WO2013183751A1 - Substrat de luminophore, dispositif luminescent, dispositif d'affichage, et dispositif d'éclairage - Google Patents
Substrat de luminophore, dispositif luminescent, dispositif d'affichage, et dispositif d'éclairage Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2013183751A1 WO2013183751A1 PCT/JP2013/065789 JP2013065789W WO2013183751A1 WO 2013183751 A1 WO2013183751 A1 WO 2013183751A1 JP 2013065789 W JP2013065789 W JP 2013065789W WO 2013183751 A1 WO2013183751 A1 WO 2013183751A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- light
- layer
- phosphor
- phosphor layer
- substrate
- Prior art date
Links
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 title claims abstract description 525
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 374
- 230000005284 excitation Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 282
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 68
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 1043
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims description 227
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 claims description 164
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 claims description 156
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 claims description 73
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 claims description 72
- 230000031700 light absorption Effects 0.000 claims description 61
- 238000000149 argon plasma sintering Methods 0.000 claims description 57
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 claims description 51
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 claims description 16
- 238000005401 electroluminescence Methods 0.000 claims description 10
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 claims description 9
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 claims description 8
- 230000008033 biological extinction Effects 0.000 claims description 3
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 1902
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 161
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 154
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 132
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 109
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 59
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 59
- -1 10-acetyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1H, 5H, 11H- [1] benzopyrano [6,7,8-ij] quinolizin-11-one (coumarin) Chemical compound 0.000 description 57
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 43
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 40
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 38
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon dioxide Inorganic materials O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 36
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 35
- 238000005253 cladding Methods 0.000 description 34
- 230000005525 hole transport Effects 0.000 description 34
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 32
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 30
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 30
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 29
- 238000007740 vapor deposition Methods 0.000 description 27
- 229910010272 inorganic material Inorganic materials 0.000 description 25
- 239000011147 inorganic material Substances 0.000 description 25
- 229910004298 SiO 2 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 24
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 24
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 24
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 23
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 23
- GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titan oxide Chemical compound O=[Ti]=O GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 20
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 20
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 19
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 19
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 19
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 17
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 17
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 16
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 15
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 15
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 15
- OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N titanium oxide Inorganic materials [Ti]=O OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Benzene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1 UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 14
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 14
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 14
- 239000004925 Acrylic resin Substances 0.000 description 13
- 229920000877 Melamine resin Polymers 0.000 description 13
- 238000010894 electron beam technology Methods 0.000 description 13
- 239000012535 impurity Substances 0.000 description 13
- 239000011229 interlayer Substances 0.000 description 13
- 229920001187 thermosetting polymer Polymers 0.000 description 13
- 229920000178 Acrylic resin Polymers 0.000 description 12
- KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Isopropanol Chemical compound CC(C)O KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 12
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 12
- 238000000206 photolithography Methods 0.000 description 12
- 229910021420 polycrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 12
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 12
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 description 12
- 238000004528 spin coating Methods 0.000 description 12
- 238000003756 stirring Methods 0.000 description 12
- BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver Chemical compound [Ag] BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- 239000010419 fine particle Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000011810 insulating material Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000011368 organic material Substances 0.000 description 11
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 11
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 10
- ZYGHJZDHTFUPRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N coumarin Chemical compound C1=CC=C2OC(=O)C=CC2=C1 ZYGHJZDHTFUPRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 239000006185 dispersion Substances 0.000 description 10
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 10
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 10
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N nickel Substances [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 229920002223 polystyrene Polymers 0.000 description 10
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 10
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Toluene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1 YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc monoxide Chemical compound [Zn]=O XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 239000011777 magnesium Substances 0.000 description 9
- BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N platinum Chemical compound [Pt] BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 229920003229 poly(methyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 9
- 239000004926 polymethyl methacrylate Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 9
- CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetone Chemical compound CC(C)=O CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 229910021417 amorphous silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 125000004432 carbon atom Chemical group C* 0.000 description 8
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000000052 comparative effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 8
- XCZXGTMEAKBVPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N trimethylgallium Chemical compound C[Ga](C)C XCZXGTMEAKBVPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 229910052581 Si3N4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 229910004283 SiO 4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 229910052788 barium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000011575 calcium Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000000460 chlorine Substances 0.000 description 7
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000002019 doping agent Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000007772 electrode material Substances 0.000 description 7
- 229910052738 indium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- APFVFJFRJDLVQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium atom Chemical compound [In] APFVFJFRJDLVQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- JDSHMPZPIAZGSV-UHFFFAOYSA-N melamine Chemical compound NC1=NC(N)=NC(N)=N1 JDSHMPZPIAZGSV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 229920005591 polysilicon Polymers 0.000 description 7
- HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon nitride Chemical compound N12[Si]34N5[Si]62N3[Si]51N64 HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 238000004506 ultrasonic cleaning Methods 0.000 description 7
- 241000254158 Lampyridae Species 0.000 description 6
- JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyridine Chemical compound C1=CC=NC=C1 JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 229910010413 TiO 2 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tin Chemical compound [Sn] ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 6
- MWPLVEDNUUSJAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N anthracene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC=CC=C3C=C21 MWPLVEDNUUSJAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 210000002858 crystal cell Anatomy 0.000 description 6
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000003999 initiator Substances 0.000 description 6
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N iron Substances [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 238000004518 low pressure chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 6
- 229910052749 magnesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000004570 mortar (masonry) Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000005192 partition Methods 0.000 description 6
- 125000002080 perylenyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=C2C=CC=C3C4=CC=CC5=CC=CC(C1=C23)=C45)* 0.000 description 6
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229910052718 tin Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 6
- DETFWTCLAIIJRZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenyl-(4-triphenylsilylphenyl)silane Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1[Si](C=1C=CC(=CC=1)[Si](C=1C=CC=CC=1)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 DETFWTCLAIIJRZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- ZOKIJILZFXPFTO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-methyl-n-[4-[1-[4-(4-methyl-n-(4-methylphenyl)anilino)phenyl]cyclohexyl]phenyl]-n-(4-methylphenyl)aniline Chemical compound C1=CC(C)=CC=C1N(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)C1(CCCCC1)C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC(C)=CC=1)C=1C=CC(C)=CC=1)C1=CC=C(C)C=C1 ZOKIJILZFXPFTO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- UJOBWOGCFQCDNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbazole Natural products C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3NC2=C1 UJOBWOGCFQCDNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000004642 Polyimide Substances 0.000 description 5
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000007983 Tris buffer Substances 0.000 description 5
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 229910052791 calcium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 5
- 229960000956 coumarin Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 235000001671 coumarin Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- ZUOUZKKEUPVFJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N diphenyl Chemical class C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 ZUOUZKKEUPVFJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000000284 extract Substances 0.000 description 5
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 5
- CSHWQDPOILHKBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N peryrene Natural products C1=CC(C2=CC=CC=3C2=C2C=CC=3)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 CSHWQDPOILHKBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229920000553 poly(phenylenevinylene) Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 239000004800 polyvinyl chloride Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229920000915 polyvinyl chloride Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 238000001771 vacuum deposition Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000011787 zinc oxide Substances 0.000 description 5
- OCJBOOLMMGQPQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-dichlorobenzene Chemical compound ClC1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1 OCJBOOLMMGQPQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acrylic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C=C NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- MSDMPJCOOXURQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N C545T Chemical compound C1=CC=C2SC(C3=CC=4C=C5C6=C(C=4OC3=O)C(C)(C)CCN6CCC5(C)C)=NC2=C1 MSDMPJCOOXURQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Magnesium Chemical compound [Mg] FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- PPBRXRYQALVLMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Styrene Chemical compound C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 PPBRXRYQALVLMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- MCMNRKCIXSYSNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zirconium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Zr]=O MCMNRKCIXSYSNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229940117389 dichlorobenzene Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 239000003989 dielectric material Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000003822 epoxy resin Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000007733 ion plating Methods 0.000 description 4
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000001451 molecular beam epitaxy Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000012044 organic layer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000035515 penetration Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229920002120 photoresistant polymer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 238000005268 plasma chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229920003227 poly(N-vinyl carbazole) Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920000647 polyepoxide Polymers 0.000 description 4
- BBEAQIROQSPTKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyrene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C=CC3=CC=CC4=CC=C1C2=C43 BBEAQIROQSPTKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- LIVNPJMFVYWSIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon monoxide Chemical compound [Si-]#[O+] LIVNPJMFVYWSIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 150000003852 triazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- IBEFSUTVZWZJEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N trimethylindium Chemical compound C[In](C)C IBEFSUTVZWZJEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- STTGYIUESPWXOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline Chemical compound C=12C=CC3=C(C=4C=CC=CC=4)C=C(C)N=C3C2=NC(C)=CC=1C1=CC=CC=C1 STTGYIUESPWXOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- GOLORTLGFDVFDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(1h-benzimidazol-2-yl)-7-(diethylamino)chromen-2-one Chemical compound C1=CC=C2NC(C3=CC4=CC=C(C=C4OC3=O)N(CC)CC)=NC2=C1 GOLORTLGFDVFDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithium Chemical compound [Li] WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000004640 Melamine resin Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000004677 Nylon Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920001328 Polyvinylidene chloride Polymers 0.000 description 3
- NRCMAYZCPIVABH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Quinacridone Chemical compound N1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C2=C1C=C1C(=O)C3=CC=CC=C3NC1=C2 NRCMAYZCPIVABH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 125000003342 alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium oxide Inorganic materials [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Al+3].[Al+3] PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000004305 biphenyl Substances 0.000 description 3
- XKHYPFFZHSGMBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N buta-1,3-diene-1,1,2,3,4,4-hexacarbonitrile Chemical compound N#CC(C#N)=C(C#N)C(C#N)=C(C#N)C#N XKHYPFFZHSGMBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- VYXSBFYARXAAKO-WTKGSRSZSA-N chembl402140 Chemical compound Cl.C1=2C=C(C)C(NCC)=CC=2OC2=C\C(=N/CC)C(C)=CC2=C1C1=CC=CC=C1C(=O)OCC VYXSBFYARXAAKO-WTKGSRSZSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000007850 fluorescent dye Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920001903 high density polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000004700 high-density polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 3
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 description 3
- AOZVYCYMTUWJHJ-UHFFFAOYSA-K iridium(3+) pyridine-2-carboxylate Chemical compound [Ir+3].[O-]C(=O)C1=CC=CC=N1.[O-]C(=O)C1=CC=CC=N1.[O-]C(=O)C1=CC=CC=N1 AOZVYCYMTUWJHJ-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 3
- 229910052744 lithium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- PQXKHYXIUOZZFA-UHFFFAOYSA-M lithium fluoride Chemical compound [Li+].[F-] PQXKHYXIUOZZFA-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 3
- SJCKRGFTWFGHGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium silver Chemical compound [Mg].[Ag] SJCKRGFTWFGHGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229920001179 medium density polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000004701 medium-density polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 3
- IBHBKWKFFTZAHE-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[4-[4-(n-naphthalen-1-ylanilino)phenyl]phenyl]-n-phenylnaphthalen-1-amine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C2=CC=CC=C2C=CC=1)C1=CC=C(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C3=CC=CC=C3C=CC=2)C=C1 IBHBKWKFFTZAHE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229920001778 nylon Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000012788 optical film Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 125000004430 oxygen atom Chemical group O* 0.000 description 3
- BPUBBGLMJRNUCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxygen(2-);tantalum(5+) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Ta+5].[Ta+5] BPUBBGLMJRNUCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229920001088 polycarbazole Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229920001343 polytetrafluoroethylene Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000004810 polytetrafluoroethylene Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000011118 polyvinyl acetate Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920002689 polyvinyl acetate Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000005033 polyvinylidene chloride Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000000644 propagated effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000011241 protective layer Substances 0.000 description 3
- UMJSCPRVCHMLSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyridine Natural products COC1=CC=CN=C1 UMJSCPRVCHMLSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000010453 quartz Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000007650 screen-printing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000011734 sodium Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000000638 solvent extraction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910052712 strontium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- NLDYACGHTUPAQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetracyanoethylene Chemical group N#CC(C#N)=C(C#N)C#N NLDYACGHTUPAQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 3
- TVIVIEFSHFOWTE-UHFFFAOYSA-K tri(quinolin-8-yloxy)alumane Chemical compound [Al+3].C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1.C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1.C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1 TVIVIEFSHFOWTE-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 3
- JLTRXTDYQLMHGR-UHFFFAOYSA-N trimethylaluminium Chemical compound C[Al](C)C JLTRXTDYQLMHGR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- ODHXBMXNKOYIBV-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenylamine Chemical class C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 ODHXBMXNKOYIBV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000011701 zinc Substances 0.000 description 3
- ZXBSSAFKXWFUMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2,3-trinitrofluoren-9-one Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C2=C1C=C([N+](=O)[O-])C([N+]([O-])=O)=C2[N+]([O-])=O ZXBSSAFKXWFUMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- YJTKZCDBKVTVBY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-Diphenylbenzene Chemical group C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC(C=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1 YJTKZCDBKVTVBY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000004057 1,4-benzoquinones Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- QKLPIYTUUFFRLV-YTEMWHBBSA-N 1,4-bis[(e)-2-(2-methylphenyl)ethenyl]benzene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1\C=C\C(C=C1)=CC=C1\C=C\C1=CC=CC=C1C QKLPIYTUUFFRLV-YTEMWHBBSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UHXOHPVVEHBKKT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-(2,2-diphenylethenyl)-4-[4-(2,2-diphenylethenyl)phenyl]benzene Chemical group C=1C=C(C=2C=CC(C=C(C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=3C=CC=CC=3)=CC=2)C=CC=1C=C(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 UHXOHPVVEHBKKT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SPDPTFAJSFKAMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-n-[4-[4-(n-[4-(3-methyl-n-(3-methylphenyl)anilino)phenyl]anilino)phenyl]phenyl]-4-n,4-n-bis(3-methylphenyl)-1-n-phenylbenzene-1,4-diamine Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC(N(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)=C1 SPDPTFAJSFKAMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JWWQNDLIYXEFQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3-dinitrofluoren-1-one Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=CC([N+](=O)[O-])=C([N+]([O-])=O)C(=O)C3=CC2=C1 JWWQNDLIYXEFQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RASFLGVDOLMZBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(9,9'-spirobi[fluorene]-2-yl)-9,9'-spirobi[fluorene] Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2C1(C1=C2)C3=CC=CC=C3C1=CC=C2C(C=C12)=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C21 RASFLGVDOLMZBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BIXGISJFDUHZEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[9,9-bis(4-methylphenyl)fluoren-2-yl]-9,9-bis(4-methylphenyl)fluorene Chemical compound C1=CC(C)=CC=C1C1(C=2C=CC(C)=CC=2)C2=CC(C=3C=C4C(C5=CC=CC=C5C4=CC=3)(C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21 BIXGISJFDUHZEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HNWFFTUWRIGBNM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methyl-9,10-dinaphthalen-2-ylanthracene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC(C3=C4C=CC=CC4=C(C=4C=C5C=CC=CC5=CC=4)C4=CC=C(C=C43)C)=CC=C21 HNWFFTUWRIGBNM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PCGDWIWUQDHQLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-morpholin-4-yl-5-nitrobenzaldehyde Chemical compound O=CC1=CC([N+](=O)[O-])=CC=C1N1CCOCC1 PCGDWIWUQDHQLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DNXUGBMARDFRGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,6-dioxocyclohexa-1,4-diene-1,2-dicarbonitrile Chemical compound O=C1C=CC(=O)C(C#N)=C1C#N DNXUGBMARDFRGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CINYXYWQPZSTOT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-[3-[3,5-bis(3-pyridin-3-ylphenyl)phenyl]phenyl]pyridine Chemical compound C1=CN=CC(C=2C=C(C=CC=2)C=2C=C(C=C(C=2)C=2C=C(C=CC=2)C=2C=NC=CC=2)C=2C=C(C=CC=2)C=2C=NC=CC=2)=C1 CINYXYWQPZSTOT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DHDHJYNTEFLIHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=NC2=C1C=CC1=C(C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=CN=C21 DHDHJYNTEFLIHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DDTHMESPCBONDT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-(4-oxocyclohexa-2,5-dien-1-ylidene)cyclohexa-2,5-dien-1-one Chemical class C1=CC(=O)C=CC1=C1C=CC(=O)C=C1 DDTHMESPCBONDT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HSHNITRMYYLLCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-methylumbelliferone Chemical compound C1=C(O)C=CC2=C1OC(=O)C=C2C HSHNITRMYYLLCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QPQKUYVSJWQSDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-phenyldiazenylaniline Chemical compound C1=CC(N)=CC=C1N=NC1=CC=CC=C1 QPQKUYVSJWQSDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZCYVEMRRCGMTRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7553-56-2 Chemical compound [I] ZCYVEMRRCGMTRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RIFLTHUXOHHZQV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-3,6-bis[9-(4-methoxyphenyl)fluoren-9-yl]carbazole Chemical compound C1=CC(OC)=CC=C1C1(C=2C=C3C4=CC(=CC=C4N(C=4C=CC(=CC=4)C(C)(C)C)C3=CC=2)C2(C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=2C=CC(OC)=CC=2)C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21 RIFLTHUXOHHZQV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IEQGNDONCZPWMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-(7-carbazol-9-yl-9,9-dimethylfluoren-2-yl)carbazole Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1=CC=C(C=2C(C3(C)C)=CC(=CC=2)N2C4=CC=CC=C4C4=CC=CC=C42)C3=C1 IEQGNDONCZPWMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910015999 BaAl Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- WKBOTKDWSSQWDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Bromine atom Chemical compound [Br] WKBOTKDWSSQWDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KAKZBPTYRLMSJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butadiene Chemical compound C=CC=C KAKZBPTYRLMSJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NLZUEZXRPGMBCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butylhydroxytoluene Chemical compound CC1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=C(O)C(C(C)(C)C)=C1 NLZUEZXRPGMBCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WYZWJLZUSHFFOR-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1=CC=C2SC(C3=CC=4C=C5CCCN6CCCC(=C56)C=4OC3=O)=NC2=C1 Chemical compound C1=CC=C2SC(C3=CC=4C=C5CCCN6CCCC(=C56)C=4OC3=O)=NC2=C1 WYZWJLZUSHFFOR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium Chemical compound [Ca] OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon dioxide Chemical compound O=C=O CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920002284 Cellulose triacetate Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004593 Epoxy Substances 0.000 description 2
- XUMBMVFBXHLACL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Melanin Chemical compound O=C1C(=O)C(C2=CNC3=C(C(C(=O)C4=C32)=O)C)=C2C4=CNC2=C1C XUMBMVFBXHLACL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910020068 MgAl Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910017639 MgSi Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229930192627 Naphthoquinone Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- YNPNZTXNASCQKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phenanthrene Natural products C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C=CC2=C1 YNPNZTXNASCQKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910006404 SnO 2 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- YTPLMLYBLZKORZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiophene Chemical compound C=1C=CSC=1 YTPLMLYBLZKORZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc Chemical compound [Zn] HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QCWXUUIWCKQGHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zirconium Chemical compound [Zr] QCWXUUIWCKQGHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NNLVGZFZQQXQNW-ADJNRHBOSA-N [(2r,3r,4s,5r,6s)-4,5-diacetyloxy-3-[(2s,3r,4s,5r,6r)-3,4,5-triacetyloxy-6-(acetyloxymethyl)oxan-2-yl]oxy-6-[(2r,3r,4s,5r,6s)-4,5,6-triacetyloxy-2-(acetyloxymethyl)oxan-3-yl]oxyoxan-2-yl]methyl acetate Chemical compound O([C@@H]1O[C@@H]([C@H]([C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H]1OC(C)=O)O[C@H]1[C@@H]([C@@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@@H](COC(C)=O)O1)OC(C)=O)COC(=O)C)[C@@H]1[C@@H](COC(C)=O)O[C@@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@H]1OC(C)=O NNLVGZFZQQXQNW-ADJNRHBOSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GWFGARXUJNKOMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3,5-di(carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-triphenylsilane Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1[Si](C=1C=C(C=C(C=1)N1C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21)N1C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 GWFGARXUJNKOMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052783 alkali metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000001340 alkali metals Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000003302 alkenyloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000003545 alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000001448 anilines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- PYKYMHQGRFAEBM-UHFFFAOYSA-N anthraquinone Natural products CCC(=O)c1c(O)c2C(=O)C3C(C=CC=C3O)C(=O)c2cc1CC(=O)OC PYKYMHQGRFAEBM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000001000 anthraquinone dye Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000004056 anthraquinones Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229910052787 antimony Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- WATWJIUSRGPENY-UHFFFAOYSA-N antimony atom Chemical compound [Sb] WATWJIUSRGPENY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004104 aryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N barium atom Chemical compound [Ba] DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QVQLCTNNEUAWMS-UHFFFAOYSA-N barium oxide Chemical compound [Ba]=O QVQLCTNNEUAWMS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JRPBQTZRNDNNOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N barium titanate Chemical compound [Ba+2].[Ba+2].[O-][Ti]([O-])([O-])[O-] JRPBQTZRNDNNOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910002113 barium titanate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 2
- XJHABGPPCLHLLV-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzo[de]isoquinoline-1,3-dione Chemical compound C1=CC(C(=O)NC2=O)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 XJHABGPPCLHLLV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 235000010290 biphenyl Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 125000000319 biphenyl-4-yl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C([H])C([H])=C1C1=C([H])C([H])=C([*])C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 2
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000001716 carbazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052801 chlorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- WDECIBYCCFPHNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N chrysene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC=C3C4=CC=CC=C4C=CC3=C21 WDECIBYCCFPHNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000013256 coordination polymer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000004093 cyano group Chemical group *C#N 0.000 description 2
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 2
- TXCDCPKCNAJMEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N dibenzofuran Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3OC2=C1 TXCDCPKCNAJMEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IYYZUPMFVPLQIF-UHFFFAOYSA-N dibenzothiophene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3SC2=C1 IYYZUPMFVPLQIF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QXYJCZRRLLQGCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N dioxomolybdenum Chemical compound O=[Mo]=O QXYJCZRRLLQGCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000007598 dipping method Methods 0.000 description 2
- GNTDGMZSJNCJKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N divanadium pentaoxide Chemical compound O=[V](=O)O[V](=O)=O GNTDGMZSJNCJKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000007606 doctor blade method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 2
- GVEPBJHOBDJJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluoranthrene Natural products C1=CC(C2=CC=CC=C22)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 GVEPBJHOBDJJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NIHNNTQXNPWCJQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CC3=CC=CC=C3C2=C1 NIHNNTQXNPWCJQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000008376 fluorenones Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 125000005843 halogen group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 238000004770 highest occupied molecular orbital Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002248 hydride vapour-phase epitaxy Methods 0.000 description 2
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000011261 inert gas Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052740 iodine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052741 iridium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium atom Chemical compound [Ir] GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000010030 laminating Methods 0.000 description 2
- FQHFBFXXYOQXMN-UHFFFAOYSA-M lithium;quinolin-8-olate Chemical compound [Li+].C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1 FQHFBFXXYOQXMN-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 238000004768 lowest unoccupied molecular orbital Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001465 metallisation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000002950 monocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- DCZNSJVFOQPSRV-UHFFFAOYSA-N n,n-diphenyl-4-[4-(n-phenylanilino)phenyl]aniline Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 DCZNSJVFOQPSRV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000002791 naphthoquinones Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 2
- SLIUAWYAILUBJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N pentacene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC4=CC5=CC=CC=C5C=C4C=C3C=C21 SLIUAWYAILUBJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 2
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- XHXFXVLFKHQFAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphoryl trichloride Chemical compound ClP(Cl)(Cl)=O XHXFXVLFKHQFAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920000767 polyaniline Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 125000003367 polycyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 229920000139 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000005020 polyethylene terephthalate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000002861 polymer material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000002952 polymeric resin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000011148 porous material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005036 potential barrier Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002310 reflectometry Methods 0.000 description 2
- PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodamine B Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C2OC2=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052594 sapphire Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010980 sapphire Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005507 spraying Methods 0.000 description 2
- PJANXHGTPQOBST-UHFFFAOYSA-N stilbene Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 PJANXHGTPQOBST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920003002 synthetic resin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910052715 tantalum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum atom Chemical compound [Ta] GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910001936 tantalum oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N tellanylidenegermanium Chemical compound [Te]=[Ge] JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IFLREYGFSNHWGE-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetracene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC4=CC=CC=C4C=C3C=C21 IFLREYGFSNHWGE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BFKJFAAPBSQJPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrafluoroethene Chemical group FC(F)=C(F)F BFKJFAAPBSQJPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JLAVCPKULITDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetraphenylsilane Chemical class C1=CC=CC=C1[Si](C=1C=CC=CC=1)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 JLAVCPKULITDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FHCPAXDKURNIOZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrathiafulvalene Chemical compound S1C=CSC1=C1SC=CS1 FHCPAXDKURNIOZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LENZDBCJOHFCAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tris Chemical compound OCC(N)(CO)CO LENZDBCJOHFCAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RFDGVZHLJCKEPT-UHFFFAOYSA-N tris(2,4,6-trimethyl-3-pyridin-3-ylphenyl)borane Chemical compound CC1=C(B(C=2C(=C(C=3C=NC=CC=3)C(C)=CC=2C)C)C=2C(=C(C=3C=NC=CC=3)C(C)=CC=2C)C)C(C)=CC(C)=C1C1=CC=CN=C1 RFDGVZHLJCKEPT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000000927 vapour-phase epitaxy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920002554 vinyl polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910052725 zinc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052726 zirconium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- DTGKSKDOIYIVQL-WEDXCCLWSA-N (+)-borneol Chemical group C1C[C@@]2(C)[C@@H](O)C[C@@H]1C2(C)C DTGKSKDOIYIVQL-WEDXCCLWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XWZOKATWICIEMU-UHFFFAOYSA-N (3,5-difluoro-4-formylphenyl)boronic acid Chemical compound OB(O)C1=CC(F)=C(C=O)C(F)=C1 XWZOKATWICIEMU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QGKMIGUHVLGJBR-UHFFFAOYSA-M (4z)-1-(3-methylbutyl)-4-[[1-(3-methylbutyl)quinolin-1-ium-4-yl]methylidene]quinoline;iodide Chemical compound [I-].C12=CC=CC=C2N(CCC(C)C)C=CC1=CC1=CC=[N+](CCC(C)C)C2=CC=CC=C12 QGKMIGUHVLGJBR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- AFVDZBIIBXWASR-AATRIKPKSA-N (E)-1,3,5-hexatriene Chemical compound C=C\C=C\C=C AFVDZBIIBXWASR-AATRIKPKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UWRZIZXBOLBCON-VOTSOKGWSA-N (e)-2-phenylethenamine Chemical class N\C=C\C1=CC=CC=C1 UWRZIZXBOLBCON-VOTSOKGWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZSYMVHGRKPBJCQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,1'-biphenyl;9h-carbazole Chemical group C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1.C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3NC2=C1 ZSYMVHGRKPBJCQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MIZLGWKEZAPEFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,1,2-trifluoroethene Chemical compound FC=C(F)F MIZLGWKEZAPEFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FOLPKOWCPVGUCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-(2-methoxypropoxy)propan-2-ol Chemical compound COC(C)COCC(C)O FOLPKOWCPVGUCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GHDZTXRYFQBMKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-(3-pyren-1-ylphenyl)pyrene Chemical compound C1=C2C(C=3C=CC=C(C=3)C=3C4=CC=C5C=CC=C6C=CC(C4=C65)=CC=3)=CC=C(C=C3)C2=C2C3=CC=CC2=C1 GHDZTXRYFQBMKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PNJTZJDRBBJYKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-[2,2-bis(4-methylphenyl)ethenyl]-4-[4-[2,2-bis(4-methylphenyl)ethenyl]phenyl]benzene Chemical group C1=CC(C)=CC=C1C(C=1C=CC(C)=CC=1)=CC1=CC=C(C=2C=CC(C=C(C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)=CC=2)C=C1 PNJTZJDRBBJYKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WVVCJGMDMMOTNG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-[4-(9H-fluoren-1-yl)phenyl]pyrene Chemical compound C1(=CC=C2C=CC3=CC=CC4=CC=C1C2=C34)C1=CC=C(C=C1)C1=CC=CC=2C3=CC=CC=C3CC1=2 WVVCJGMDMMOTNG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XRYMKABVVKOUNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-[4-[1-[4-(9H-carbazol-1-yl)phenyl]-2-phenylcyclohexa-2,4-dien-1-yl]phenyl]-9H-carbazole Chemical group C1(=CC=CC=2C3=CC=CC=C3NC1=2)C1=CC=C(C=C1)C1(C(=CC=CC1)C1=CC=CC=C1)C1=CC=C(C=C1)C1=CC=CC=2C3=CC=CC=C3NC1=2 XRYMKABVVKOUNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IYZMXHQDXZKNCY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-n,1-n-diphenyl-4-n,4-n-bis[4-(n-phenylanilino)phenyl]benzene-1,4-diamine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 IYZMXHQDXZKNCY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001637 1-naphthyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C2C(*)=C([H])C([H])=C([H])C2=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- WJFKNYWRSNBZNX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 10H-phenothiazine Chemical compound C1=CC=C2NC3=CC=CC=C3SC2=C1 WJFKNYWRSNBZNX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MAPCFLKVLLDGMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2'-di(pyren-1-yl)-9,9'-spirobi[fluorene] Chemical compound C1=C2C(C3=CC=C4C=5C(C6(C7=CC(=CC=C7C7=CC=CC=C76)C=6C7=CC=C8C=CC=C9C=CC(C7=C98)=CC=6)C4=C3)=CC=CC=5)=CC=C(C=C3)C2=C2C3=CC=CC2=C1 MAPCFLKVLLDGMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004338 2,2,3-trimethylbutyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C(C([H])([H])[H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000003562 2,2-dimethylpentyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C(C([H])([H])[H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- LWHDQPLUIFIFFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3,5,6-tetrabromocyclohexa-2,5-diene-1,4-dione Chemical group BrC1=C(Br)C(=O)C(Br)=C(Br)C1=O LWHDQPLUIFIFFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JKLYZOGJWVAIQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3,5,6-tetrafluorocyclohexa-2,5-diene-1,4-dione Chemical compound FC1=C(F)C(=O)C(F)=C(F)C1=O JKLYZOGJWVAIQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HZNVUJQVZSTENZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyano-1,4-benzoquinone Chemical compound ClC1=C(Cl)C(=O)C(C#N)=C(C#N)C1=O HZNVUJQVZSTENZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003660 2,3-dimethylpentyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000003764 2,4-dimethylpentyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- KDZJTAOJXVMQET-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline 1,10-phenanthroline Chemical class N1=CC=CC2=CC=C3C=CC=NC3=C12.CC1=NC2=C3N=C(C=C(C3=CC=C2C(=C1)C1=CC=CC=C1)C1=CC=CC=C1)C KDZJTAOJXVMQET-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GEQBRULPNIVQPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[3,5-bis(1-phenylbenzimidazol-2-yl)phenyl]-1-phenylbenzimidazole Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N1C2=CC=CC=C2N=C1C1=CC(C=2N(C3=CC=CC=C3N=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)=CC(C=2N(C3=CC=CC=C3N=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1 GEQBRULPNIVQPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IXHWGNYCZPISET-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[4-(dicyanomethylidene)-2,3,5,6-tetrafluorocyclohexa-2,5-dien-1-ylidene]propanedinitrile Chemical compound FC1=C(F)C(=C(C#N)C#N)C(F)=C(F)C1=C(C#N)C#N IXHWGNYCZPISET-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DVYLUICLRMFHRU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[4-[2-(1,3-benzoxazol-2-yl)ethenyl]phenyl]-5-methyl-1,3-benzoxazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2OC(C=CC3=CC=C(C=C3)C=3OC4=CC=C(C=C4N=3)C)=NC2=C1 DVYLUICLRMFHRU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DXWHZJXKTHGHQF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-butyl-6-(butylamino)benzo[de]isoquinoline-1,3-dione Chemical compound O=C1N(CCCC)C(=O)C2=CC=CC3=C2C1=CC=C3NCCCC DXWHZJXKTHGHQF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003229 2-methylhexyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000005916 2-methylpentyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- HONWGFNQCPRRFM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-n-(3-methylphenyl)-1-n,1-n,2-n-triphenylbenzene-1,2-diamine Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC(N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C(=CC=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1 HONWGFNQCPRRFM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001622 2-naphthyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C2C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C([H])C2=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- VQGHOUODWALEFC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-phenylpyridine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=N1 VQGHOUODWALEFC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BCHZICNRHXRCHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2h-oxazine Chemical compound N1OC=CC=C1 BCHZICNRHXRCHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004336 3,3-dimethylpentyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C(C([H])([H])[H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- ADENFOWRGOZGCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,5-bis(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-phenyl-1,2,4-triazole Chemical compound C1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=CC=C1C(N1C=2C=CC=CC=2)=NN=C1C1=CC=C(C(C)(C)C)C=C1 ADENFOWRGOZGCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YNTQHSDEZACXAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,5-di(pyren-1-yl)pyridine Chemical compound c1cc2ccc3ccc(-c4cncc(c4)-c4ccc5ccc6cccc7ccc4c5c67)c4ccc(c1)c2c34 YNTQHSDEZACXAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GWHSOUPRKHXZPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,6-bis(3,5-diphenylphenyl)-9-phenylcarbazole Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC(C=2C=CC=CC=2)=CC(C=2C=C3C4=CC(=CC=C4N(C=4C=CC=CC=4)C3=CC=2)C=2C=C(C=C(C=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1 GWHSOUPRKHXZPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZHTRIPZOLUKZBJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,6-bis(diphenylphosphoryl)-9-phenylcarbazole Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1P(C=1C=C2C3=CC(=CC=C3N(C=3C=CC=CC=3)C2=CC=1)P(=O)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 ZHTRIPZOLUKZBJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QQEAKKMJHBCNRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,6-di(carbazol-9-yl)-9-(2-ethylhexyl)carbazole Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1=CC=C2N(CC(CC)CCCC)C3=CC=C(N4C5=CC=CC=C5C5=CC=CC=C54)C=C3C2=C1 QQEAKKMJHBCNRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QCAHUFWKIQLBNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(3-methoxypropoxy)propan-1-ol Chemical compound COCCCOCCCO QCAHUFWKIQLBNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004337 3-ethylpentyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- OGGKVJMNFFSDEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-n-[4-[4-(n-(3-methylphenyl)anilino)phenyl]phenyl]-n-phenylaniline Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC(N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)=C1 OGGKVJMNFFSDEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003469 3-methylhexyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000005917 3-methylpentyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000003349 3-pyridyl group Chemical group N1=C([H])C([*])=C([H])C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- NURUHMMUJFXYDY-UHFFFAOYSA-M 4-[4-(1-ethylpyridin-1-ium-2-yl)buta-1,3-dienyl]-n,n-dimethylaniline;perchlorate Chemical compound [O-]Cl(=O)(=O)=O.CC[N+]1=CC=CC=C1C=CC=CC1=CC=C(N(C)C)C=C1 NURUHMMUJFXYDY-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- AWXGSYPUMWKTBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-carbazol-9-yl-n,n-bis(4-carbazol-9-ylphenyl)aniline Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1=CC=C(N(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=C1 AWXGSYPUMWKTBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YWKKLBATUCJUHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-methyl-n-(4-methylphenyl)-n-phenylaniline Chemical compound C1=CC(C)=CC=C1N(C=1C=CC(C)=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 YWKKLBATUCJUHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NYMLZIFRPNYAHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-phenyl-1h-1,2,4-triazole Chemical compound C1=NNC(C=2C=CC=CC=2)=N1 NYMLZIFRPNYAHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FQLZTPSAVDHUKS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-amino-2-(2,4-dimethylphenyl)benzo[de]isoquinoline-1,3-dione Chemical compound CC1=CC(C)=CC=C1N(C1=O)C(=O)C2=C3C1=CC=CC3=C(N)C=C2 FQLZTPSAVDHUKS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GZVHEAJQGPRDLQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-phenyl-1,3,5-triazine-2,4-diamine Chemical compound NC1=NC(N)=NC(C=2C=CC=CC=2)=N1 GZVHEAJQGPRDLQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZHBOFZNNPZNWGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9,10-bis(phenylethynyl)anthracene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C#CC(C1=CC=CC=C11)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1C#CC1=CC=CC=C1 ZHBOFZNNPZNWGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XUPHFLNNUVKICJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-3,6-ditritylcarbazole Chemical compound C1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=CC=C1N1C2=CC=C(C(C=3C=CC=CC=3)(C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=C2C2=CC(C(C=3C=CC=CC=3)(C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=3C=CC=CC=3)=CC=C21 XUPHFLNNUVKICJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SWUBEMMFTUPINB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-[3-carbazol-9-yl-5-(4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)phenyl]carbazole Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=NC(C=2C=CC=CC=2)=NC(C=2C=C(C=C(C=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)=N1 SWUBEMMFTUPINB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LTUJKAYZIMMJEP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-[4-(4-carbazol-9-yl-2-methylphenyl)-3-methylphenyl]carbazole Chemical group C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1=CC=C(C=2C(=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C)C(C)=C1 LTUJKAYZIMMJEP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VFUDMQLBKNMONU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-[4-(4-carbazol-9-ylphenyl)phenyl]carbazole Chemical group C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1=CC=C(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=C1 VFUDMQLBKNMONU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UXJDSNKBYFJNDO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-[4-[2-[2-(4-carbazol-9-ylphenyl)phenyl]phenyl]phenyl]carbazole Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C(C=C1)=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=C(N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=C1 UXJDSNKBYFJNDO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FHDKOSLORKUETK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-[4-[3-(4-carbazol-9-ylphenyl)-2,6-diphenylfuro[2,3-f][1]benzofuran-7-yl]phenyl]carbazole Chemical compound c1ccc(cc1)-c1oc2cc3c(c(oc3cc2c1-c1ccc(cc1)-n1c2ccccc2c2ccccc12)-c1ccccc1)-c1ccc(cc1)-n1c2ccccc2c2ccccc12 FHDKOSLORKUETK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VESMRDNBVZOIEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9h-carbazole-1,2-diamine Chemical class C1=CC=C2C3=CC=C(N)C(N)=C3NC2=C1 VESMRDNBVZOIEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GDALETGZDYOOGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acridone Natural products C1=C(O)C=C2N(C)C3=CC=CC=C3C(=O)C2=C1O GDALETGZDYOOGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001316 Ag alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 101001091423 Agaricus bisporus Polyphenol oxidase 2 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910018072 Al 2 O 3 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910000838 Al alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910001148 Al-Li alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910000505 Al2TiO5 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910002704 AlGaN Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-O Ammonium Chemical compound [NH4+] QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-O 0.000 description 1
- 101000611523 Arabidopsis thaliana Protoporphyrinogen oxidase 2, chloroplastic/mitochondrial Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910017008 AsF 6 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910016036 BaF 2 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910015802 BaSr Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- DXUHAPHNWMVGDG-UHFFFAOYSA-N C(C)(C)(C)C1=CC=C(C=C1)C1=CN=NO1 Chemical class C(C)(C)(C)C1=CC=C(C=C1)C1=CN=NO1 DXUHAPHNWMVGDG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MHYQBXJRURFKIN-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1(C=CC=C1)[Mg] Chemical compound C1(C=CC=C1)[Mg] MHYQBXJRURFKIN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BFDFHGPJXDFXBA-UHFFFAOYSA-N C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2C1(C1=C2)C3=CC=CC=C3C1=CC=C2C(C=C1C2(C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C2=C3)=CC=C1C2=CC=C3C(C=C12)=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C21 Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2C1(C1=C2)C3=CC=CC=C3C1=CC=C2C(C=C1C2(C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C2=C3)=CC=C1C2=CC=C3C(C=C12)=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C21 BFDFHGPJXDFXBA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HFPKZKXVTHRNFZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1=CC(C)=CC=C1C1(C=2C=CC(C)=CC=2)C2=CC(C=3C=C4C(C5=CC(=CC=C5C4=CC=3)C=3C=C4C(C5=CC=CC=C5C4=CC=3)(C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)(C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21 Chemical compound C1=CC(C)=CC=C1C1(C=2C=CC(C)=CC=2)C2=CC(C=3C=C4C(C5=CC(=CC=C5C4=CC=3)C=3C=C4C(C5=CC=CC=C5C4=CC=3)(C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)(C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)C=3C=CC(C)=CC=3)=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21 HFPKZKXVTHRNFZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DVLTYJIOONATFM-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1=CC=CC=C1C1(C=2C=C(C=CC=2)C2(C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=2C=CC=CC=2)C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21 Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1(C=2C=C(C=CC=2)C2(C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=2C=CC=CC=2)C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21 DVLTYJIOONATFM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FSWRERQILDSDIM-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1=CC=CC=C1C1(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C2(C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=2C=CC=CC=2)C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21 Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C2(C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=2C=CC=CC=2)C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21 FSWRERQILDSDIM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920002134 Carboxymethyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052684 Cerium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-M Chloride anion Chemical compound [Cl-] VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chlorine atom Chemical compound [Cl] ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910016460 CzSi Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- YFPJFKYCVYXDJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Diphenylphosphine oxide Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1[P+](=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 YFPJFKYCVYXDJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100025027 E3 ubiquitin-protein ligase TRIM69 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229920001875 Ebonite Polymers 0.000 description 1
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VGGSQFUCUMXWEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethene Chemical compound C=C VGGSQFUCUMXWEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-M Fluoride anion Chemical compound [F-] KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorine atom Chemical compound [F] YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001218 Gallium arsenide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 108010043121 Green Fluorescent Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000830203 Homo sapiens E3 ubiquitin-protein ligase TRIM69 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920000663 Hydroxyethyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004354 Hydroxyethyl cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M Ilexoside XXIX Chemical compound C[C@@H]1CC[C@@]2(CC[C@@]3(C(=CC[C@H]4[C@]3(CC[C@@H]5[C@@]4(CC[C@@H](C5(C)C)OS(=O)(=O)[O-])C)C)[C@@H]2[C@]1(C)O)C)C(=O)O[C@H]6[C@@H]([C@H]([C@@H]([C@H](O6)CO)O)O)O.[Na+] DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229910001030 Iron–nickel alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910018068 Li 2 O Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920009204 Methacrylate-butadiene-styrene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methacrylic acid Chemical compound CC(=C)C(O)=O CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101100476480 Mus musculus S100a8 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100023550 Mycobacterium bovis (strain ATCC BAA-935 / AF2122/97) cmaD gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910000583 Nd alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ZCQWOFVYLHDMMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Oxazole Chemical compound C1=COC=N1 ZCQWOFVYLHDMMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000286 Poly(2-decyloxy-1,4-phenylene) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001609 Poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000291 Poly(9,9-dioctylfluorene) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004695 Polyether sulfone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000265 Polyparaphenylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004372 Polyvinyl alcohol Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZLMJMSJWJFRBEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Potassium Chemical compound [K] ZLMJMSJWJFRBEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000676 Si alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- BLRPTPMANUNPDV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silane Chemical compound [SiH4] BLRPTPMANUNPDV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000006087 Silane Coupling Agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- PJANXHGTPQOBST-VAWYXSNFSA-N Stilbene Natural products C=1C=CC=CC=1/C=C/C1=CC=CC=C1 PJANXHGTPQOBST-VAWYXSNFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XBDYBAVJXHJMNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tetrahydroanthracene Chemical group C1=CC=C2C=C(CCCC3)C3=CC2=C1 XBDYBAVJXHJMNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920001807 Urea-formaldehyde Polymers 0.000 description 1
- DGEZNRSVGBDHLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N [1,10]phenanthroline Chemical compound C1=CN=C2C3=NC=CC=C3C=CC2=C1 DGEZNRSVGBDHLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WIHKEPSYODOQJR-UHFFFAOYSA-N [9-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-6-triphenylsilylcarbazol-3-yl]-triphenylsilane Chemical compound C1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=CC=C1N1C2=CC=C([Si](C=3C=CC=CC=3)(C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=C2C2=CC([Si](C=3C=CC=CC=3)(C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=3C=CC=CC=3)=CC=C21 WIHKEPSYODOQJR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JFBZPFYRPYOZCQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Li].[Al] Chemical compound [Li].[Al] JFBZPFYRPYOZCQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011358 absorbing material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000999 acridine dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- FZEYVTFCMJSGMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N acridone Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(=O)C3=CC=CC=C3NC2=C1 FZEYVTFCMJSGMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003670 adamantan-2-yl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C(C2([H])[H])([H])C([H])([H])C3([H])C([*])([H])C1([H])C([H])([H])C2([H])C3([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- ORILYTVJVMAKLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N adamantane Chemical compound C1C(C2)CC3CC1CC2C3 ORILYTVJVMAKLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001573 adamantine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000002411 adverse Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052784 alkaline earth metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001342 alkaline earth metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229920000109 alkoxy-substituted poly(p-phenylene vinylene) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000180 alkyd Polymers 0.000 description 1
- CSDREXVUYHZDNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N alumanylidynesilicon Chemical compound [Al].[Si] CSDREXVUYHZDNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UBSJOWMHLJZVDJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminum neodymium Chemical compound [Al].[Nd] UBSJOWMHLJZVDJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000002518 antifoaming agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940058303 antinematodal benzimidazole derivative Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940027991 antiseptic and disinfectant quinoline derivative Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000004984 aromatic diamines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000004945 aromatic hydrocarbons Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000987 azo dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- OYLGJCQECKOTOL-UHFFFAOYSA-L barium fluoride Chemical compound [F-].[F-].[Ba+2] OYLGJCQECKOTOL-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229910001632 barium fluoride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 1
- HFACYLZERDEVSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzidine Chemical class C1=CC(N)=CC=C1C1=CC=C(N)C=C1 HFACYLZERDEVSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001558 benzoic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052790 beryllium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ATBAMAFKBVZNFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N beryllium atom Chemical compound [Be] ATBAMAFKBVZNFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QJXVCEINEQQSPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N bis(2-methylphenyl)-diphenylsilane Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1[Si](C=1C(=CC=CC=1)C)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 QJXVCEINEQQSPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YLNJGHNUXCVDIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N bis(2-methylpropyl) perylene-3,9-dicarboxylate Chemical compound C=12C3=CC=CC2=C(C(=O)OCC(C)C)C=CC=1C1=CC=CC2=C1C3=CC=C2C(=O)OCC(C)C YLNJGHNUXCVDIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FCDNEESKPPIAJZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N bis[3,5-di(carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-diphenylsilane Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1[Si](C=1C=C(C=C(C=1)N1C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21)N1C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21)(C=1C=C(C=C(C=1)N1C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21)N1C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21)C1=CC=CC=C1 FCDNEESKPPIAJZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GDTBXPJZTBHREO-UHFFFAOYSA-N bromine Substances BrBr GDTBXPJZTBHREO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052794 bromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- UHYPYGJEEGLRJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N cadmium(2+);selenium(2-) Chemical compound [Se-2].[Cd+2] UHYPYGJEEGLRJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000001569 carbon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910002092 carbon dioxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 239000001768 carboxy methyl cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010948 carboxy methyl cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000008112 carboxymethyl-cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000919 ceramic Substances 0.000 description 1
- GWXLDORMOJMVQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N cerium Chemical compound [Ce] GWXLDORMOJMVQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001309 chloro group Chemical group Cl* 0.000 description 1
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229940114081 cinnamate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000004696 coordination complex Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- VSSSHNJONFTXHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N coumarin 153 Chemical compound C12=C3CCCN2CCCC1=CC1=C3OC(=O)C=C1C(F)(F)F VSSSHNJONFTXHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LGDDFMCJIHJNMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N coumarin 337 Chemical compound C12=C3CCCN2CCCC1=CC1=C3OC(=O)C(C#N)=C1 LGDDFMCJIHJNMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VMJKUPWQKZFFCX-UHFFFAOYSA-N coumarin 504 Chemical compound C1CCC2=C(OC(C(C(=O)OCC)=C3)=O)C3=CC3=C2N1CCC3 VMJKUPWQKZFFCX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VBVAVBCYMYWNOU-UHFFFAOYSA-N coumarin 6 Chemical compound C1=CC=C2SC(C3=CC4=CC=C(C=C4OC3=O)N(CC)CC)=NC2=C1 VBVAVBCYMYWNOU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000004775 coumarins Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000002425 crystallisation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008025 crystallization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 1
- LNDJVIYUJOJFSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyanoacetylene Chemical group C#CC#N LNDJVIYUJOJFSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000006165 cyclic alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000001995 cyclobutyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000000582 cycloheptyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000000113 cyclohexyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- WVIIMZNLDWSIRH-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexylcyclohexane Chemical compound C1CCCCC1C1CCCCC1 WVIIMZNLDWSIRH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000006547 cyclononyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000000640 cyclooctyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000001511 cyclopentyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000001559 cyclopropyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C1([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000002704 decyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- SWXVUIWOUIDPGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N diacetone alcohol Natural products CC(=O)CC(C)(C)O SWXVUIWOUIDPGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000004985 diamines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000003085 diluting agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910001873 dinitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- PPSZHCXTGRHULJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N dioxazine Chemical compound O1ON=CC=C1 PPSZHCXTGRHULJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UIJLKECZHOSSHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N diphenyl-bis(4-pyridin-3-ylphenyl)silane Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1[Si](C=1C=CC(=CC=1)C=1C=NC=CC=1)(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)C=1C=NC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 UIJLKECZHOSSHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DMBHHRLKUKUOEG-UHFFFAOYSA-N diphenylamine Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1NC1=CC=CC=C1 DMBHHRLKUKUOEG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GPAYUJZHTULNBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N diphenylphosphine Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1PC1=CC=CC=C1 GPAYUJZHTULNBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000428 dust Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000295 emission spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004945 emulsification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000005678 ethenylene group Chemical group [H]C([*:1])=C([H])[*:2] 0.000 description 1
- 125000001301 ethoxy group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])O* 0.000 description 1
- 125000001495 ethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 239000001019 fluorene dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- GNBHRKFJIUUOQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorescein Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC=C(O)C=C1OC1=CC(O)=CC=C21 GNBHRKFJIUUOQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000003682 fluorination reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011737 fluorine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000001153 fluoro group Chemical group F* 0.000 description 1
- IVJISJACKSSFGE-UHFFFAOYSA-N formaldehyde;1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6-triamine Chemical compound O=C.NC1=NC(N)=NC(N)=N1 IVJISJACKSSFGE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000499 gel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007756 gravure coating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000017525 heat dissipation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 description 1
- 235000019447 hydroxyethyl cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000003230 hygroscopic agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001746 injection moulding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009413 insulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011630 iodine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005468 ion implantation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010884 ion-beam technique Methods 0.000 description 1
- AIZHGNQYRBRXOZ-UHFFFAOYSA-K iridium(3+) 2-phenyl-1H-pyridine-2-carboxylate Chemical compound [Ir+3].C1(=CC=CC=C1)C1(NC=CC=C1)C(=O)[O-].C1(=CC=CC=C1)C1(NC=CC=C1)C(=O)[O-].C1(=CC=CC=C1)C1(NC=CC=C1)C(=O)[O-] AIZHGNQYRBRXOZ-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- UEMRKUZSFJOLDN-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium(3+) borate Chemical compound [Ir+3].[O-]B([O-])[O-] UEMRKUZSFJOLDN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000001678 irradiating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000000959 isobutyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- PXZQEOJJUGGUIB-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoindolin-1-one Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(=O)NCC2=C1 PXZQEOJJUGGUIB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001972 isopentyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000001449 isopropyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 238000005304 joining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003475 lamination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007644 letterpress printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000001989 lithium alloy Substances 0.000 description 1
- FUJCRWPEOMXPAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N lithium oxide Chemical compound [Li+].[Li+].[O-2] FUJCRWPEOMXPAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001947 lithium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000000040 m-tolyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(*)=C([H])C(=C1[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 229910052748 manganese Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000002923 metal particle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- LPQMOFIXRVVOSF-UHFFFAOYSA-M methyl sulfate;n-methyl-n-[(1,3,3-trimethylindol-1-ium-2-yl)methylideneamino]aniline Chemical compound COS([O-])(=O)=O.C[N+]=1C2=CC=CC=C2C(C)(C)C=1/C=N/N(C)C1=CC=CC=C1 LPQMOFIXRVVOSF-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229910021424 microcrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 101150024128 mmaA1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000004108 n-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000003136 n-heptyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000001280 n-hexyl group Chemical group C(CCCCC)* 0.000 description 1
- 125000000740 n-pentyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000004123 n-propyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000001971 neopentyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C(C([H])([H])[H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000000449 nitro group Chemical group [O-][N+](*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 125000001400 nonyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000002868 norbornyl group Chemical group C12(CCC(CC1)C2)* 0.000 description 1
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- WCPAKWJPBJAGKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxadiazole Chemical compound C1=CON=N1 WCPAKWJPBJAGKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000004866 oxadiazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- MPQXHAGKBWFSNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxidophosphanium Chemical class [PH3]=O MPQXHAGKBWFSNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoalumanyloxy)alumane Chemical compound O=[Al]O[Al]=O TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GPRIERYVMZVKTC-UHFFFAOYSA-N p-quaterphenyl Chemical group C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=C(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=C1 GPRIERYVMZVKTC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001037 p-tolyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(=C([H])C([H])=C1*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- NFHFRUOZVGFOOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N palladium;triphenylphosphane Chemical compound [Pd].C1=CC=CC=C1P(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1.C1=CC=CC=C1P(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1.C1=CC=CC=C1P(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1.C1=CC=CC=C1P(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 NFHFRUOZVGFOOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000001792 phenanthrenyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC=2C3=CC=CC=C3C=CC12)* 0.000 description 1
- 239000005011 phenolic resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229950000688 phenothiazine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000000951 phenoxy group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(O*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- 150000004986 phenylenediamines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- RLOWWWKZYUNIDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphinic chloride Chemical compound ClP=O RLOWWWKZYUNIDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011574 phosphorus Substances 0.000 description 1
- IEQIEDJGQAUEQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N phthalocyanine Chemical compound N1C(N=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C(N=C3C4=CC=CC=C4C(=N4)N3)=N2)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1N=C1C2=CC=CC=C2C4=N1 IEQIEDJGQAUEQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000001007 phthalocyanine dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000704 physical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002493 poly(chlorotrifluoroethylene) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001643 poly(ether ketone) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001467 poly(styrenesulfonates) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000327 poly(triphenylamine) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002037 poly(vinyl butyral) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006122 polyamide resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920005668 polycarbonate resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004431 polycarbonate resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001225 polyester resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004645 polyester resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920006393 polyether sulfone Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000009719 polyimide resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000006116 polymerization reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229960002796 polystyrene sulfonate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000011970 polystyrene sulfonate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000123 polythiophene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920005749 polyurethane resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002451 polyvinyl alcohol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052700 potassium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011591 potassium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 1
- AABBHSMFGKYLKE-SNAWJCMRSA-N propan-2-yl (e)-but-2-enoate Chemical compound C\C=C\C(=O)OC(C)C AABBHSMFGKYLKE-SNAWJCMRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003220 pyrenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000003222 pyridines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- WQGWDDDVZFFDIG-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyrogallol Chemical class OC1=CC=CC(O)=C1O WQGWDDDVZFFDIG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000006862 quantum yield reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003248 quinolines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052761 rare earth metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000002994 raw material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000006798 recombination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005215 recombination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- MUSLHCJRTRQOSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodamine 101 Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C(C1=CC=2CCCN3CCCC(C=23)=C1O1)=C2C1=C(CCC1)C3=[N+]1CCCC3=C2 MUSLHCJRTRQOSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MYIOYATURDILJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodamine 110 Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=CC(N)=CC2=[O+]C2=CC(N)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O MYIOYATURDILJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940043267 rhodamine b Drugs 0.000 description 1
- SOUHUMACVWVDME-UHFFFAOYSA-N safranin O Chemical compound [Cl-].C12=CC(N)=CC=C2N=C2C=CC(N)=CC2=[N+]1C1=CC=CC=C1 SOUHUMACVWVDME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003566 sealing material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002914 sec-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000003548 sec-pentyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 229910000077 silane Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000004756 silanes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229920002050 silicone resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052708 sodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000007790 solid phase Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052596 spinel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011029 spinel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003892 spreading Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007480 spreading Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000021286 stilbenes Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- VEALVRVVWBQVSL-UHFFFAOYSA-N strontium titanate Chemical compound [Sr+2].[O-][Ti]([O-])=O VEALVRVVWBQVSL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005504 styryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229940124530 sulfonamide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- COIVODZMVVUETJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N sulforhodamine 101 Chemical compound OS(=O)(=O)C1=CC(S([O-])(=O)=O)=CC=C1C1=C(C=C2C3=C4CCCN3CCC2)C4=[O+]C2=C1C=C1CCCN3CCCC2=C13 COIVODZMVVUETJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PBCFLUZVCVVTBY-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum pentoxide Inorganic materials O=[Ta](=O)O[Ta](=O)=O PBCFLUZVCVVTBY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KKEYFWRCBNTPAC-UHFFFAOYSA-L terephthalate(2-) Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)C1=CC=C(C([O-])=O)C=C1 KKEYFWRCBNTPAC-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 125000000999 tert-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(*)(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000001973 tert-pentyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C(*)(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- UGNWTBMOAKPKBL-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrachloro-1,4-benzoquinone Chemical compound ClC1=C(Cl)C(=O)C(Cl)=C(Cl)C1=O UGNWTBMOAKPKBL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000001016 thiazine dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001017 thiazole dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- JOUDBUYBGJYFFP-FOCLMDBBSA-N thioindigo Chemical compound S\1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C/1=C1/C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2S1 JOUDBUYBGJYFFP-FOCLMDBBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229930192474 thiophene Natural products 0.000 description 1
- LLZRNZOLAXHGLL-UHFFFAOYSA-J titanic acid Chemical compound O[Ti](O)(O)O LLZRNZOLAXHGLL-UHFFFAOYSA-J 0.000 description 1
- WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-VOTSOKGWSA-M trans-cinnamate Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)\C=C\C1=CC=CC=C1 WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-VOTSOKGWSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000012780 transparent material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003918 triazines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- DBDJXGIDPXHUGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenyl-(6-triphenylsilyl-9h-carbazol-3-yl)silane Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1[Si](C=1C=C2C3=CC(=CC=C3NC2=CC=1)[Si](C=1C=CC=CC=1)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 DBDJXGIDPXHUGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LNQMQGXHWZCRFZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenyl-[4-(4-triphenylsilylphenyl)phenyl]silane Chemical group C1=CC=CC=C1[Si](C=1C=CC(=CC=1)C=1C=CC(=CC=1)[Si](C=1C=CC=CC=1)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 LNQMQGXHWZCRFZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HITRWHKLCHWBNZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenyl-[4-(9-phenylfluoren-9-yl)phenyl]silane Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)[Si](C=2C=CC=CC=2)(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21 HITRWHKLCHWBNZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KIGXXTRUJYDDKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenyl-[4-[4-(4-triphenylsilylphenyl)phenyl]phenyl]silane Chemical group C1=CC=CC=C1[Si](C=1C=CC(=CC=1)C=1C=CC(=CC=1)C=1C=CC(=CC=1)[Si](C=1C=CC=CC=1)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 KIGXXTRUJYDDKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000006617 triphenylamine group Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- MXSVLWZRHLXFKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenylborane Chemical class C1=CC=CC=C1B(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 MXSVLWZRHLXFKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AAAQKTZKLRYKHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenylmethane Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 AAAQKTZKLRYKHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010086502 tumor-derived adhesion factor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052720 vanadium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000012808 vapor phase Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001947 vapour-phase growth Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000000391 vinyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 239000004034 viscosity adjusting agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001018 xanthene dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003751 zinc Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- OYQCBJZGELKKPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc indium(3+) oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[Zn+2].[O-2].[In+3] OYQCBJZGELKKPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L33/00—Semiconductor devices having potential barriers specially adapted for light emission; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
- H01L33/48—Semiconductor devices having potential barriers specially adapted for light emission; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by the semiconductor body packages
- H01L33/50—Wavelength conversion elements
- H01L33/505—Wavelength conversion elements characterised by the shape, e.g. plate or foil
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1335—Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
- G02F1/1336—Illuminating devices
- G02F1/133617—Illumination with ultraviolet light; Luminescent elements or materials associated to the cell
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/30—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission
- H10K59/38—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising colour filters or colour changing media [CCM]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/80—Constructional details
- H10K59/875—Arrangements for extracting light from the devices
- H10K59/877—Arrangements for extracting light from the devices comprising scattering means
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L2924/00—Indexing scheme for arrangements or methods for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies as covered by H01L24/00
- H01L2924/0001—Technical content checked by a classifier
- H01L2924/0002—Not covered by any one of groups H01L24/00, H01L24/00 and H01L2224/00
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L2933/00—Details relating to devices covered by the group H01L33/00 but not provided for in its subgroups
- H01L2933/0091—Scattering means in or on the semiconductor body or semiconductor body package
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L33/00—Semiconductor devices having potential barriers specially adapted for light emission; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
- H01L33/48—Semiconductor devices having potential barriers specially adapted for light emission; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by the semiconductor body packages
- H01L33/50—Wavelength conversion elements
- H01L33/507—Wavelength conversion elements the elements being in intimate contact with parts other than the semiconductor body or integrated with parts other than the semiconductor body
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a phosphor substrate, a light emitting device, a display device, and a lighting device that include a phosphor layer that emits fluorescence by excitation light.
- the need for flat panel displays has increased with the advancement of information technology in society.
- the flat panel display include a non-self-luminous liquid crystal display (LCD), a self-luminous plasma display (PDP), an inorganic electroluminescence (inorganic EL) display, and organic electroluminescence (hereinafter, “organic EL”). Or a display or the like.
- an illumination device is generally provided as a light source on the back surface of a transmissive liquid crystal display element, and visibility is improved by irradiating the liquid crystal element from the back surface.
- the light emitted from the light source is generally non-polarized light, and more than 50% is absorbed by the polarizing plate disposed on the illumination light incident side of the liquid crystal display element.
- a color liquid crystal display device that uses a white light source as a light source and arranges a micro color filter corresponding to the three primary colors or the four primary colors in the display surface and performs color display by additive color mixing, light exceeding 70% is emitted by the color filter. Since it is absorbed, the utilization efficiency of the light source light is very low, and increasing the efficiency of the light utilization efficiency has become a major issue.
- a liquid crystal display element having a voltage applying means for applying a voltage corresponding to an image signal to a matrix pixel formed by a transparent electrode, an illumination device emitting light from a blue region to a blue-green region, and a blue region to a blue-green region Wavelength-converting phosphor that emits red light using the light from the light source, wavelength-converting phosphor that emits green light using the light from the blue region to the blue-green region, and light other than the blue region to the blue-green region
- a color display device including a color filter for cutting (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).
- a blue light source that emits blue light
- a liquid crystal element having a liquid crystal cell and a pair of deflecting plates sandwiching the liquid crystal cell, and excited by the blue light
- a liquid crystal display comprising: a phosphor that emits red fluorescence; a color filter having a phosphor that emits green fluorescence when excited by the blue light; and a light scattering film that scatters at least the blue light.
- An apparatus is known (see, for example, Patent Document 3).
- the light traveling direction is set between the light emitting layer and the outside so that the front luminance value and the luminance value in the direction of the viewing angle of 50 ° to 70 ° satisfy the luminance value of the front luminance value ⁇ 50 ° to 70 °.
- an organic EL element in which a layer that is disturbed by reflection and refraction is provided and light in a wide-angle region with a large proportion of the amount of light is extracted from the relationship of the solid angle to improve the light extraction efficiency (for example, (See Patent Document 4).
- the phosphor layer is isotropic, that is, has the property of emitting light with equal energy in any direction, when considering the viewing angle characteristics of the brightness defined by the brightness level of the display, Due to the solid angle, it has a profile in which the luminance increases as the viewing angle increases when the viewing angle (angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction) is from 0 ° to around 80 °. There are many.
- the direction of visually recognizing the display is mostly in the vicinity of 0 °, and even in a television, the viewing direction is up to about 60 ° (for example, see Reference 1). Therefore, in order to use light effectively, a means for optimizing the emission profile of the phosphor is necessary.
- the liquid crystal display device described in Patent Document 3 has a light scattering film that scatters blue light to at least a blue pixel, so that the viewing angle of light emitted from the blue pixel can be increased, but the light scattering film Since only the function to scatter blue light is provided, the emission profiles of red and green pixels cannot be combined. That is, since there is no way to match the light emission profiles between the pixels, there is a problem that the color changes when the display image is viewed obliquely, and the viewing angle color display characteristics deteriorate.
- the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and adjusts the emission profile of fluorescence emitted from a phosphor layer to an optimum light distribution profile by combining the phosphor layer and the light distribution adjustment layer. And having a plurality of phosphor layers having different emission profiles, combining at least one light distribution adjusting layer suitable for each phosphor layer with the phosphor layer can produce different fluorescence layers.
- An object of the present invention is to provide a phosphor substrate, a light emitting device, a display device, and an illuminating device that can be combined with a light emission profile from a body layer and have a good viewing angle color display characteristic that does not change in color depending on the viewing angle. And
- the phosphor substrate of the present invention includes a substrate on which a phosphor layer that is excited by excitation light and emits fluorescence is formed on one surface, and a light distribution adjustment layer that changes at least the emission direction of fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer. Is formed.
- the light distribution adjusting layer is made of a light scattering material including a light-transmitting resin in which at least one particle is mixed.
- a light emitting device includes the phosphor substrate described in each of the above items and an excitation light source that emits the excitation light.
- the light distribution adjustment layer is disposed between the substrate and the phosphor layer.
- the light distribution adjusting layer has a luminance value L1 in a direction of a viewing angle of 0 ° that is a normal direction perpendicular to the emitting surface and a viewing angle of 0 ° from the emitting surface facing the incident surface of the excitation light on the substrate.
- the fluorescence is emitted so that the relationship with the luminance value L2 of a larger viewing angle satisfies at least L1 ⁇ L2.
- the light distribution adjusting layer emits fluorescence so that a relationship between the luminance value L1 and the luminance value L3 in the direction of the viewing angle of 60 ° satisfies at least L3 / L1 ⁇ 0.8.
- a light-reflective barrier is formed on at least one side surface along the thickness direction of the phosphor layer.
- the excitation light incident surface side of the phosphor layer transmits at least excitation light in a peak wavelength region of the excitation light wavelength range and has a wavelength range of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer.
- a wavelength selection layer that reflects at least fluorescence in a peak wavelength region is formed.
- a low refractive index layer having a refractive index smaller than that of the phosphor layer is disposed between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selection layer. Further, the low refractive index layer is further disposed between the light distribution adjusting layer and the phosphor layer. Further, the refractive index of the low refractive index layer is in the range of 1 to 1.5.
- the low refractive index layer is composed of a gas.
- a plurality of the phosphor layers are arranged side by side on one surface of the substrate.
- a plurality of the light distribution adjustment layers are arranged side by side so as to correspond to each of the plurality of phosphor layers.
- a light absorption layer is further disposed between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other.
- the light absorption layer may be further disposed between the light distribution adjustment layers adjacent to each other.
- the light absorption layer may be formed on at least one of an upper surface or a lower surface extending perpendicular to the thickness direction of the barrier.
- At least a portion of the barrier that is in contact with the phosphor layer has light scattering properties.
- at least a portion of the barrier that is in contact with the phosphor layer has an uneven shape.
- the light distribution adjusting layer is characterized by spreading along an exit surface facing the incident surface of the excitation light on the substrate.
- a display device includes the light-emitting device described in each of the above items.
- the excitation light source emits excitation light in the ultraviolet wavelength region
- the phosphor layer comprises a red phosphor layer that constitutes a red pixel that emits red light by excitation light in the ultraviolet wavelength region, and a green phosphor layer that constitutes a green pixel that emits green light by excitation light in the ultraviolet wavelength region And a blue phosphor layer that constitutes a blue pixel that emits blue light by excitation light in the ultraviolet wavelength region.
- the excitation light source emits excitation light in a blue wavelength region
- the phosphor layer includes a red phosphor layer that constitutes a red pixel that emits red light by the excitation light in the blue wavelength region, and a green phosphor layer that constitutes a green pixel that emits green light by the excitation light in the blue wavelength region. And a blue scatterer layer constituting a blue pixel that scatters the excitation light in the blue wavelength region. Further, the blue scatterer layer and the light distribution adjustment layer are integrally formed.
- the excitation light source emits excitation light in a blue wavelength region
- the phosphor layer includes a red phosphor layer that constitutes a red pixel that emits red light by the excitation light in the blue wavelength region, and a green phosphor layer that constitutes a green pixel that emits green light by the excitation light in the blue wavelength region. And a blue phosphor layer that constitutes a blue pixel that emits blue light by the excitation light in the blue wavelength region.
- An active matrix driving element corresponding to the excitation light source is arranged. Further, the excitation light source is composed of any one of a light emitting diode, an organic electroluminescence element, and an inorganic electroluminescence element.
- the excitation light source is a planar light source, and a liquid crystal element capable of controlling the transmittance of the excitation light is formed between the excitation light source and the substrate.
- the excitation light emitted from the excitation light source has directivity.
- a polarizing plate having an extinction ratio of 10,000 or more at a wavelength of 435 nm or more and 480 nm or less is provided between the excitation light source and the substrate. Further, a color filter is provided between at least one of the phosphor layer and the light distribution adjustment layer, or between the light distribution adjustment layer and the substrate.
- the color change ⁇ u′v ′ of the omnidirectional chromaticity u ′, v ′ with respect to the value of the chromaticity u ′, v ′ in the front direction of the light emitted from the light emitting surface is 0.01 or less. It is characterized by.
- the light distribution adjusting layer or an external light antireflection layer for preventing reflection of external light may be provided so as to overlap the substrate. Further, the refractive index of the external light antireflection layer has a refractive index gradient that gradually increases or decreases along the thickness direction.
- a lighting device includes the light-emitting device described in each of the above items.
- the present invention it is possible to adjust the light emission profile of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer to an optimum light distribution profile, and to further match the light distribution profiles of the phosphor layers having different light emission profiles. Therefore, it is possible to provide a phosphor substrate, a light emitting device, a display device, and a lighting device having good viewing angle color display characteristics that do not change in color depending on the viewing angle.
- 1 is a schematic plan view showing an organic EL display constituting a display device according to the present invention. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the display apparatus which concerns on this invention. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the display apparatus which concerns on this invention. It is an external view showing a mobile phone as an application example of a display device according to the present invention. It is an external view which shows the thin television which is one application example of the display apparatus which concerns on this invention.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a first example of a conventional light emitting device.
- a conventional light-emitting device 10 is generally configured by an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, and a substrate 13 that is arranged opposite to the excitation light source and on which a phosphor layer 12 that is excited by the excitation light and emits fluorescence is formed. ing.
- the phosphor layer is isotropic, that is, has a characteristic of emitting light with equal energy in any direction.
- the viewing angle characteristic of the brightness defined by the brightness level of the display, the light emitted from the phosphor layer and extracted outside through the substrate, as shown in FIG.
- the viewing angle angle formed by the viewing direction and the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface
- the profile often has a higher luminance as the viewing angle increases.
- the direction of visually recognizing the display is mostly in the vicinity of 0 °, and the viewing direction is about 60 ° even on a television. Therefore, there is a problem that light cannot be used effectively.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a second example of a conventional light emitting device.
- a conventional light emitting device 20 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a first phosphor layer 21 that is arranged to face the excitation light source, emits fluorescence when excited by the excitation light, and a second phosphor layer. 22, a third phosphor layer 23, and a substrate 13 in which a light absorption layer 24 is formed between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other.
- the light distribution profile of the light emitted from the phosphor layer and extracted outside through the substrate is as follows. May vary by layer. In such a case, there is a problem that the tint changes between when the display image is viewed from the front and when viewed from an oblique direction, and the viewing angle color display characteristics are degraded.
- the term viewing angle indicates that the phosphor Fm is formed as shown in FIG. )
- a direction along the light emission surface FPa of the phosphor substrate FP made of the substrate P is defined as a viewing angle of 90 °
- a direction perpendicular to the emission surface is defined as a viewing angle of 0 °.
- the viewing angle is 45 °
- the angle is inclined at 45 ° between the direction (90 °) along the emission surface of the phosphor substrate and the direction (0 °) perpendicular to the emission surface.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device according to the first embodiment.
- the light emitting device 30 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a substrate 13 that is disposed to face the excitation light source, and is formed with a phosphor layer 12 that is excited by the excitation light and emits fluorescence.
- a light distribution adjusting layer 31 that is formed between the phosphor layers 12 and changes the emission direction of the fluorescence emitted from at least the phosphor layers is roughly constituted.
- the phosphor layer 12 is formed on one surface of the substrate 13, and a light distribution adjustment layer 31 is formed between the phosphor layer 12 and the substrate 13.
- each structural member which comprises the light-emitting device 30, and its formation method are demonstrated concretely, this embodiment is not limited to these structural members and a formation method.
- the excitation light source 11 for exciting the phosphor a light source that emits ultraviolet light or blue light is used.
- a light source that emits ultraviolet light or blue light.
- examples of such a light source include an ultraviolet light emitting diode (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “ultraviolet LED”), a blue light emitting diode (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “blue LED”), and an ultraviolet light emitting inorganic electroluminescence.
- An element hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “ultraviolet light emitting inorganic EL element”
- a blue light emitting inorganic electroluminescence element hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “blue light emitting inorganic EL element”
- an ultraviolet light emitting organic electroluminescence element hereinafter, light emitting elements such as “ultraviolet light emitting organic EL element” and blue light emitting organic electroluminescence element (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “blue light emitting organic EL element”) may be used.
- the excitation light source 11 include those described above, but are not limited thereto.
- the excitation light source 11 by directly switching the excitation light source 11, it is possible to control ON / OFF of light emission for displaying an image.
- a liquid crystal or the like is provided between the excitation light source 11 and the phosphor layer 12. It is also possible to control ON / OFF of light emission by arranging a layer having a proper shutter function and controlling it. Moreover, it is also possible to control ON / OFF of both the layer having a shutter function such as liquid crystal and the excitation light source 11.
- the phosphor layer 12 absorbs excitation light from light emitting elements such as an ultraviolet LED, a blue LED, an ultraviolet light emitting inorganic EL element, a blue light emitting inorganic EL element, an ultraviolet light emitting organic EL element, and a blue light emitting organic EL element.
- the red phosphor layer that emits blue light, the green phosphor layer, and the blue phosphor layer.
- the red phosphor layer, the green phosphor layer, and the blue phosphor layer are made of, for example, a thin film having a rectangular shape in plan view.
- each pixel constituting the phosphor layer 13 it is preferable to add phosphors emitting light of cyan and yellow to each pixel constituting the phosphor layer 13 as necessary.
- phosphors emitting light of cyan and yellow by setting the color purity of each pixel emitting light to cyan and yellow outside the triangle connected by the color purity points of red, green, and blue light emitting pixels on the chromaticity diagram, red, The color reproduction range can be further expanded as compared with a display device that uses pixels that emit three primary colors of green and blue.
- the phosphor layer 12 may be composed of only the phosphor material exemplified below, and may optionally contain additives, etc., and these materials are in a polymer material (binding resin) or an inorganic material. The configuration may be distributed in a distributed manner.
- a known phosphor material can be used as the phosphor material constituting the phosphor layer 12. Such phosphor materials are classified into organic phosphor materials and inorganic phosphor materials. Although these specific compounds are illustrated below, this embodiment is not limited to these materials.
- stilbenzene dyes 1,4-bis (2-methylstyryl) benzene, trans-4,4′-diphenylstil Benzene
- coumarin dyes 7-hydroxy-4-methylcoumarin, 2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-11-oxo-1H, 5H, 11H- [1] benzopyrano [6,7,8-ij] quinolidine- Ethyl 10-carboxylate (coumarin 314), 10-acetyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1H, 5H, 11H- [1] benzopyrano [6,7,8-ij] quinolizin-11-one (coumarin) 334), anthracene dyes: 9,10 bis (phenylethynyl) anthracene, perylene and the like.
- Organic phosphor materials include coumarin dyes: 2,3,5,6-1H, 4H-tetrahydro-8-trifluoromethylquinolidine as green fluorescent dyes that convert ultraviolet and blue excitation light into green light emission (9,9a, 1-gh) coumarin (coumarin 153), 3- (2′-benzothiazolyl) -7-diethylaminocoumarin (coumarin 6), 3- (2′-benzoimidazolyl) -7-N, N-diethylaminocoumarin (Coumarin 7), 10- (benzothiazol-2-yl) -2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1H, 5H, 11H- [1] benzopyrano [6,7,8-ij] quinolizin-11-one (Coumarin 545), coumarin 545T, coumarin 545P, naphthalimide dyes: basic yellow 51, solvent yellow 11, solvent Yellow 98, Solvent Yellow 116, Solvent Yellow 43, Solvent Yellow 44, Perylene dyes: Lum
- Organic phosphor materials include cyanine dyes: 4-dicyanomethylene-2-methyl-6- (p-dimethylaminostyryl) -4H as red fluorescent dyes that convert ultraviolet and blue excitation light into red light emission.
- pyridine dye 1-ethyl-2- [4- (p-dimethylaminophenyl) -1,3-butadienyl] -pyridinium-perchlorate (pyridine 1)
- xanthene dye rhodamine B, rhodamine 6G , Rhodamine 3B, rhodamine 101, rhodamine 110, basic violet 11, sulforhodamine 101, basic violet 11, basic red 2
- perylene dye lumogen orange, lumogen pink, rumogen red, solvent orange 55, oxazine dye, chrysene dye, Thiofurabi Dye, pyrene dye, anthracene dye, acridone dye, a
- each color phosphor When an organic phosphor material is used as each color phosphor, it is desirable to use a dye that is not easily degraded by blue light, ultraviolet light, or external light of the backlight. In this respect, it is particularly preferable to use a perylene dye having excellent light resistance and a high quantum yield.
- Sr 2 P 2 O 7 Sn 4+
- Sr 4 Al 14 O 25 Eu 2+
- BaMgAl 10 O 17 Eu are used as blue phosphors that convert ultraviolet excitation light into blue light emission.
- inorganic phosphor materials include (BaMg) Al 16 O 27 : Eu 2+ , Mn 2+ , Sr 4 Al 14 O 25 : Eu 2+ , as green phosphors that convert ultraviolet and blue excitation light into green light emission.
- Y 2 O 2 S Eu 3+
- YAlO 3 Eu 3+
- Ca 2 Y 2 (SiO 4 ) 6 is used as a red phosphor that converts ultraviolet and blue excitation light into red light emission.
- the inorganic phosphor material may be subjected to surface modification treatment as necessary.
- the surface modification treatment include chemical treatment using a silane coupling agent, physical treatment using addition of submicron order fine particles, and combinations thereof.
- the average particle diameter (d 50 ) is preferably 0.5 to 50 ⁇ m. If the average particle size of the inorganic phosphor material is less than 0.5 ⁇ m, the luminous efficiency of the phosphor is drastically lowered. If the average particle size of the inorganic phosphor material exceeds 50 ⁇ m, it becomes very difficult to form a planarizing film, and a gap is formed between the phosphor layer 12 and the excitation light source 11 (excitation light source). 11 and the phosphor layer 12 (refractive index: about 2.3), the light from the excitation light source 11 does not efficiently reach the phosphor layer 12, and the phosphor layer. There arises a problem that the luminous efficiency of 12 is lowered.
- the phosphor layer 12 is prepared by using a phosphor layer forming coating solution obtained by dissolving and dispersing the phosphor material and the resin material in a solvent, using a spin coating method, a dipping method, a doctor blade method, a discharge coating method, Known wet processes such as coating methods such as spray coating, ink jet methods, letterpress printing methods, intaglio printing methods, screen printing methods, microgravure coating methods, and the like, and resistance heating vapor deposition method, electron beam ( EB) It can be formed by a known dry process such as a vapor deposition method, a molecular beam epitaxy (MBE) method, a sputtering method, an organic vapor deposition (OVPD) method, or a formation method such as a laser transfer method.
- a spin coating method such as spray coating, ink jet methods, letterpress printing methods, intaglio printing methods, screen printing methods, microgravure coating methods, and the like
- resistance heating vapor deposition method electron beam (
- the phosphor layer 12 can be patterned by a photolithography method by using a photosensitive resin as a polymer resin.
- a photosensitive resin a photosensitive resin (photocurable resist material) having a reactive vinyl group such as an acrylic acid resin, a methacrylic acid resin, a polyvinyl cinnamate resin, or a hard rubber resin is used. It is possible to use one kind or a mixture of several kinds.
- wet process such as ink jet method, relief printing method, intaglio printing method, screen printing method, dispenser method, resistance heating vapor deposition method using shadow mask, electron beam (EB) vapor deposition method, molecular beam epitaxy (MBE) method, It is also possible to directly pattern the phosphor material by a known dry process such as a sputtering method or an organic vapor deposition (OVPD) method, or a laser transfer method.
- a dry process such as a sputtering method or an organic vapor deposition (OVPD) method, or a laser transfer method.
- the binder resin material is preferably a translucent resin.
- the resin material include acrylic resin, melamine resin, polyester resin, polyurethane resin, alkyd resin, epoxy resin, butyral resin, polysilicone resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, melanin resin, phenol resin, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl Hydrine, hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, aromatic sulfonamide resin, urea resin, benzoguanamine resin, triacetyl cellulose (TAC), polyethersulfone, polyetherketone, nylon, polystyrene, melamine beads, polycarbonate, polyvinyl chloride, Polyvinylidene chloride, polyvinyl acetate, polyethylene, polymethyl methacrylate, poly MBS, medium density polyethylene, high density polyethylene, tetrafluoroethylene Oroechiren, poly trifluorochloroethylene, polytetrafluoroethylene and the like.
- the thickness of the phosphor layer 12 is usually about 100 nm to 100 ⁇ m, but preferably 1 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m. If the film thickness is less than 100 nm, it is impossible to sufficiently absorb the light emitted from the excitation light source 11, so that the light emission efficiency is reduced, or the required color is mixed with blue transmitted light, resulting in color purity. Problems such as deterioration. Furthermore, in order to increase absorption of light emitted from the excitation light source 11 and reduce blue transmitted light to such an extent that the color purity is not adversely affected, the film thickness is preferably 1 ⁇ m or more. Further, when the film thickness exceeds 100 ⁇ m, the blue light emission from the excitation light source 11 is already sufficiently absorbed, so that the efficiency is not increased but only the material is consumed and the material cost is increased.
- an inorganic material substrate made of glass, quartz, etc., polyethylene
- plastic substrates made of terephthalate, polycarbazole, polyimide, and the like, but the present embodiment is not limited to these substrates.
- a plastic substrate from the viewpoint that it is possible to form a bent portion or a bent portion without any stress. Further, from the viewpoint that the gas barrier property can be improved, a substrate obtained by coating a plastic substrate with an inorganic material is more preferable. As a result, when the plastic substrate is used as the substrate of the organic EL element, the deterioration of the organic EL element due to the permeation of moisture, which is the biggest problem (the organic EL element is known to deteriorate even with a low amount of moisture, in particular). Can be eliminated.
- the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is provided between the phosphor layer 12 and the substrate 13 and has a property of changing the light distribution profile of the fluorescence incident on the substrate 13 out of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 12. .
- the light distribution adjusting layer 31 may be made of a light scattering material containing at least one particle and a light-transmitting resin.
- the particles may be either inorganic materials or organic materials.
- an inorganic material for example, a particle (fine particle) mainly composed of an oxide of at least one metal selected from the group consisting of silicon, titanium, zirconium, aluminum, indium, zinc, tin and antimony.
- the present embodiment is not limited to these inorganic materials.
- particles (inorganic fine particles) made of an inorganic material for example, silica beads (refractive index: 1.44), alumina beads (refractive index: 1.63), titanium oxide beads ( Anatase type refractive index: 2.52, rutile type refractive index: 2.71), zirconia bead (refractive index: 2.05), zinc oxide beads (refractive index: 2.00), barium titanate (BaTiO) 3 ) (refractive index: 2.4) and the like, but this embodiment is not limited to these inorganic fine particles.
- particles composed of an organic material
- polymethyl methacrylate beads reffractive index: 1.49
- acrylic beads reffractive index: 1.50
- acrylic-styrene Polymer beads reffractive index: 1.54
- melamine beads reffractive index: 1.57)
- high refractive index melamine beads refractive index: 1.65
- polycarbonate beads refractive index: 1.57
- styrene beads Refractive index: 1.60
- crosslinked polystyrene beads Refractive index: 1.61
- polyvinyl chloride beads reffractive index: 1.60
- melamine formaldehyde beads reffractive index: 1.65
- benzoguanamine-melamine formaldehyde Examples include beads (refractive index: 1.68) and silicone beads (refractive index: 1.50). It is not limited to the organic fine particles.
- the translucent resin for example, acrylic resin (refractive index: 1.49), melamine resin (refractive index: 1.57), nylon (refractive index: 1.53), polystyrene (refractive index: 1.60). , Melamine beads (refractive index: 1.57), polycarbonate (refractive index: 1.57), polyvinyl chloride (refractive index: 1.60), polyvinylidene chloride (refractive index: 1.61), polyvinyl acetate ( Refractive index: 1.46), polyethylene (refractive index: 1.53), polymethyl methacrylate (refractive index: 1.49), poly MBS (refractive index: 1.54), medium density polyethylene (refractive index: 1) .53), high density polyethylene (refractive index: 1.54), tetrafluoroethylene (refractive index: 1.35), poly (trifluoroethylene chloride) (refractive index: 1.42), polytetrafluoroethylene (refractive index) : .35), and the
- the light scatterer material can be formed by dispersing particles in the above-described translucent resin.
- the disperser is equipped with a general agitator equipped with mechanisms such as propeller blades, turbine blades, and battle blades at the tip, or a toothed disk-shaped impeller mechanism with circular saw blades bent alternately up and down.
- the particle size, the refractive index, the concentration, the refractive index of the translucent resin, and the film thickness of the light distribution adjusting layer 31 of the particles constituting the light scatterer material depend on the light distribution profile of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 12. To optimize.
- the luminance value of the oblique direction component is larger. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress the brightness to a value equal to or less than the luminance value in the 0 ° direction, so that particles having a particle size equivalent to the wavelength of light are used, the concentration of the particles is increased, or the particles and the translucent resin are used. It is preferable to increase the difference in refractive index or increase the film thickness.
- the average particle size of the particles is more preferably 150 nm to 900 nm.
- the particle size of the particles is about the same as the wavelength with respect to the light in the entire visible light region, and the light hitting the particles causes Mie scattering in which forward scattering and side scattering are dominant, and in an oblique direction.
- the direction of the traveling light can be changed.
- the concentration of the particles with respect to the translucent resin is more preferably 0.5 wt% to 5 wt%.
- concentration of the particles with respect to the translucent resin is more preferably 0.5 wt% to 5 wt%.
- it is 0.5 wt% or less, sufficient scattering characteristics cannot be obtained, and as a result, light in an oblique direction is lost as it is.
- it is 5 wt% or more, the backscattered light component increases, resulting in a low transmittance.
- the difference in refractive index between the particles and the translucent resin is 0.05 or more. If it is 0.05 or less, sufficient scattering characteristics cannot be obtained, and as a result, light in an oblique direction passes through as it is.
- the film thickness of the light scattering layer 31 is more preferably 1 ⁇ m to 15 ⁇ m. If it is 1 ⁇ m or less, sufficient scattering characteristics cannot be obtained, and as a result, light in an oblique direction passes through as it is. On the other hand, when it is 15 ⁇ m or more, the backscattered light component increases, and as a result, the transmittance decreases.
- the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is not limited to the above-described configuration including the particles and the translucent resin.
- the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is incident by refraction and reflection by forming a random fine structure on the surface. It may be a layer that changes the direction of light.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 30 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 30 when excitation light enters the phosphor layer 12 from the excitation light source 11, light is emitted from the phosphor layer 12 isotropically, that is, with equal energy in any direction.
- the luminance viewing angle characteristic of this light is such that the larger the viewing angle is, the larger the viewing angle is between 0 ° and 80 °, since the viewing angle (the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction) is related to the solid angle.
- the viewing angle the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction
- the optical path length in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and light incident in an oblique direction.
- the latter light is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer 31 with respect to the former.
- a light emission profile in which the luminance increases as the viewing angle increases is changed to a light emission profile in which at least the luminance in the 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer 31. be able to.
- a light-emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction can be obtained.
- the substrate 13 exists between the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and the outside, the influence on the characteristics of the light distribution adjustment layer 31 due to changes in the surrounding environment can be minimized.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a second embodiment of the light emitting device. 4, the same components as those of the light emitting device 30 shown in FIG. 3 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
- the light emitting device 40 changes an emission direction of fluorescence emitted from the excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a phosphor layer 12 that emits fluorescence when excited by the excitation light on the excitation light source, and at least the phosphor layer 12.
- the light distribution adjusting layer 31 is generally configured.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 40 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 40 when excitation light is incident on the phosphor layer 12 from the excitation light source 11, light is emitted from the phosphor layer 12 isotropically, that is, with equal energy in any direction.
- the luminance viewing angle characteristic of this light is such that the larger the viewing angle is, the larger the viewing angle is between 0 ° and 80 °, since the viewing angle (the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction) is related to the solid angle.
- the viewing angle the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction
- this light enters the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and is scattered in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 to change the traveling direction of the light.
- the optical path length in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and light incident in an oblique direction.
- the latter light is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer 31 with respect to the former.
- a light emission profile in which the luminance increases as the viewing angle increases is changed to a light emission profile in which at least the luminance in the 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer 31. be able to.
- a light-emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction can be obtained.
- the light emitted from the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is extracted as it is without passing through other layers, so that the emission profile can be optimized only by adjusting the light distribution adjustment layer 31. Can do.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device according to a third embodiment.
- the light-emitting device 50 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a substrate 13 that is disposed opposite to the excitation light source and on which a phosphor layer 12 that is excited by the excitation light and emits fluorescence is formed, the substrate 13, and the substrate At least the phosphor layer 12 along the stacking direction of the substrate 13 and the light distribution adjustment layer 31 that is formed between the phosphor layers 12 and changes the emission direction of at least fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer. It is generally composed of a light reflective barrier 51 on one or more sides.
- Examples of the light-reflective barrier 51 include a structure in which a reflective metal powder such as Al, Ag, Au, Cr, or an alloy thereof, or a reflective resin film made of a resin containing metal particles is formed.
- a reflective metal powder such as Al, Ag, Au, Cr, or an alloy thereof
- a reflective resin film made of a resin containing metal particles is formed.
- the present embodiment is not limited to these.
- the barrier 51 may have a light scattering property at least in a portion in contact with the phosphor layer 12.
- a material for forming the barrier 51 itself hereinafter referred to as “barrier material” or a material for forming a light scattering layer (light scattering film) provided on the side surface of the barrier 51 (hereinafter referred to as “light scattering film material”).
- carrier material a material for forming the barrier 51 itself
- light scattering film material a material for forming a light scattering layer (light scattering film) provided on the side surface of the barrier 51
- a material containing a resin and light scattering particles is used.
- the resin examples include acrylic resin (refractive index: 1.49), melamine resin (refractive index: 1.57), nylon (refractive index: 1.53), polystyrene (refractive index: 1.60), melamine beads. (Refractive index: 1.57), polycarbonate (refractive index: 1.57), polyvinyl chloride (refractive index: 1.60), polyvinylidene chloride (refractive index: 1.61), polyvinyl acetate (refractive index: 1.46), polyethylene (refractive index: 1.53), polymethyl methacrylate (refractive index: 1.49), poly MBS (refractive index: 1.54), medium density polyethylene (refractive index: 1.53) , High density polyethylene (refractive index: 1.54), tetrafluoroethylene (refractive index: 1.35), poly (ethylene trifluoride) chloride (refractive index: 1.42), polytetrafluoroethylene (refractive index: 1.2. 3 ) And the like, but the
- the light scattering particles may be either an inorganic material or an organic material.
- the main component is an oxide of at least one metal selected from the group consisting of silicon, titanium, zirconium, aluminum, indium, zinc, tin, and antimony. Examples include particles (fine particles), but the present embodiment is not limited to these inorganic materials.
- particles (inorganic fine particles) made of an inorganic material are used as the light scattering particles, for example, silica beads (refractive index: 1.44), alumina beads (refractive index: 1.63), oxidation Titanium beads (anatase type refractive index: 2.50, rutile type refractive index: 2.70), zirconia oxide beads (refractive index: 2.05), zinc oxide beads (refractive index: 2.00), titanic acid barium (BaTiO 3) (refractive index: 2.4), but like the present embodiment is not limited to these inorganic fine particles.
- particles (organic fine particles) made of an organic material are used as the light scattering particles, for example, polymethyl methacrylate beads (refractive index: 1.49), acrylic beads (refractive index: 1.50), acrylic -Styrene copolymer beads (refractive index: 1.54), melamine beads (refractive index: 1.57), high refractive index melamine beads (refractive index: 1.65), polycarbonate beads (refractive index: 1.57) Styrene beads (refractive index: 1.60), crosslinked polystyrene beads (refractive index: 1.61), polyvinyl chloride beads (refractive index: 1.60), benzoguanamine-melamine formaldehyde beads (refractive index: 1.68) And silicone beads (refractive index: 1.50), and the like, but this embodiment is not limited to these organic fine particles.
- the barrier material and the light scattering film material may contain an antifoaming agent / leveling agent such as a photopolymerization initiator, dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether, and 1- (2-methoxy-2-methylethoxy) -2-propanol. .
- the barrier 51 may be white.
- the barrier material and the light scattering film material may contain a white resist.
- the white resist include a carboxyl group-containing resin having no aromatic ring, a photopolymerization initiator, a hydrogenated epoxy compound, a rutile type titanium oxide, and a material containing a diluent.
- the barrier material and the light scattering film material can be made into a photoresist.
- the light scattering layer provided on the side surface of the barrier 15 can be patterned by photolithography.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 50 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 50 when excitation light is incident on the phosphor layer 12 from the excitation light source 11, light is emitted from the phosphor layer 12 isotropically, that is, with equal energy in any direction.
- the luminance viewing angle characteristic of this light is such that the larger the viewing angle is, the larger the viewing angle is between 0 ° and 80 °, since the viewing angle (the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction) is related to the solid angle.
- the viewing angle the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction
- this light enters the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and is scattered in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 to change the traveling direction of the light.
- the optical path length in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and light incident in an oblique direction.
- the latter light is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer 31 with respect to the former.
- a light emission profile in which the luminance increases as the viewing angle increases is changed to a light emission profile in which at least the luminance in the 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer 31. be able to.
- a light-emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction can be obtained.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided on the side surface of the phosphor layer 12, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 12, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and the fluorescence
- the fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the body layer 12 is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 on the side surface of the phosphor layer 12, it is possible to efficiently extract the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer 12 to the outside. If the portion of the barrier 51 in contact with the phosphor layer 12 has light scattering properties, for example, when the fluorescent component that has been totally reflected once by the substrate is reflected by the barrier 51 and reenters the substrate, first, the substrate The fluorescent component totally reflected at 13 and incident on the barrier 51 is reflected (scattered) by the barrier 51 at an angle different from the incident angle and is incident on the substrate at an angle different from the first angle. There is little possibility of being reflected, and it can be taken out to the outside. That is, by providing the light-scattering barrier 51 on the side surface of the phosphor layer 12, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer 12 can be taken out more efficiently.
- FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device according to a fourth embodiment.
- the light-emitting device 60 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a substrate 13 that is disposed to face the excitation light source, and is formed with a phosphor layer 12 that is excited by the excitation light and emits fluorescence. At least the phosphor layer 12 along the stacking direction of the substrate 13 and the light distribution adjustment layer 31 that is formed between the phosphor layers 12 and changes the emission direction of at least fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer.
- a light-reflective barrier 51 is formed on one or more side surfaces, and a wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 formed on the phosphor layer 12 on the incident surface side on which excitation light is incident.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface of the excitation light of the phosphor layer 12 and the upper surface of the barrier 51, and transmits at least light corresponding to the peak wavelength of the excitation light from the excitation light source 11. It is a layer having a characteristic of reflecting at least light corresponding to the emission peak wavelength of the body layer 12.
- the fluorescent component directed toward the back side of the light emitting device 60 is efficiently transmitted by the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 provided on the incident surface of the phosphor layer 12. Therefore, the light can be reflected in the front direction, and the light emission efficiency can be improved.
- Examples of the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 include a dielectric multilayer film, a metal thin film glass, an inorganic material substrate made of quartz or the like, a plastic substrate made of polyethylene terephthalate, polycarbazole, polyimide, or the like. However, it is not limited to these substrates.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 60 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 60 when excitation light is incident on the phosphor layer 12 from the excitation light source 11, light is emitted from the phosphor layer 12 isotropically, that is, with equal energy in any direction.
- the luminance viewing angle characteristic of this light is such that the larger the viewing angle is, the larger the viewing angle is between 0 ° and 80 °, since the viewing angle (the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction) is related to the solid angle. Has a high profile.
- this light enters the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and is scattered in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 to change the traveling direction of the light.
- the light path length in the light distribution adjusting layer 31 is longer in the light distribution layer 31 for light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light scattering layer 31 and light incident in an oblique direction.
- the latter light is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer 31 with respect to the former.
- a light emission profile in which the luminance increases as the viewing angle increases is changed to a light emission profile in which at least the luminance in the 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer 31. be able to.
- a light-emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction can be obtained.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided on the side surface of the phosphor layer 12, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 12, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and the fluorescence
- the fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the body layer 12 is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 on the side surface of the phosphor layer 12, it is possible to efficiently extract the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer 12 to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer 12, the opposite side (rear side) of the phosphor layer 12 to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component that emits light is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer 12 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the incident surface side of the phosphor layer 12 where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer 12 can be extracted to the outside very efficiently. .
- FIG. 7 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device according to a fifth embodiment.
- the light-emitting device 70 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a substrate 13 that is disposed opposite to the excitation light source, and is formed with a phosphor layer 12 that is excited by the excitation light and emits fluorescence. At least the phosphor layer 12 along the stacking direction of the substrate 13 and the light distribution adjustment layer 31 that is formed between the phosphor layers 12 and changes the emission direction of at least fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer.
- the low refractive index layer 71 is provided between the phosphor layer 12 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, and out of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer, the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer is greater than the critical angle.
- a layer having a feature of reflecting at least the fluorescence incident on the interface is a low refractive index provided between the phosphor layer 12 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61.
- the layer 71 can be efficiently reflected in the front direction, and the light emission efficiency can be improved.
- Examples of the low refractive index layer 71 include a fluorine resin having a refractive index of about 1.35 to 1.4, a silicone resin having a refractive index of about 1.4 to 1.5, and a silica having a refractive index of about 1.003 to 1.3.
- Examples include airgel and transparent materials such as porous silica having a refractive index of about 1.2 to 1.3. However, the present embodiment is not limited to these materials.
- the refractive index of the low refractive index layer 71 is preferably as low as possible.
- the low refractive index layer 71 is made of silica airgel or porous material in order to have pores or voids in the low refractive index layer 71. Those formed of silica or the like are more preferable. Silica airgel is particularly preferred because it has a very low refractive index.
- Silica airgel is disclosed in, for example, US Pat. No. 4,402,827, Japanese Patent Publication “Patent No. 4279971”, Japanese Published Patent Publication “JP-A 2001-202827” and the like. It is produced by drying a gel compound in a wet state comprising a silica skeleton obtained by a polymerization reaction in the presence of a solvent such as alcohol or carbon dioxide in a supercritical state above the critical point of the solvent.
- a solvent such as alcohol or carbon dioxide
- the low refractive index layer 71 is preferably made of a gas. As described above, the refractive index of the low refractive index layer 71 is preferably as low as possible. However, when the low refractive index layer 71 is formed of a material such as a solid, liquid, or gel, US Pat. No. 4,402,827 and Japanese Patent Publication “ As described in Japanese Patent No. 4279971 ”, Japanese Patent Application Publication“ JP-A 2001-202827 ”and the like, the lower limit of the refractive index is about 1.003. On the other hand, if the low refractive index layer 16 is a gas layer made of a gas such as oxygen or nitrogen, for example, the refractive index can be set to 1.0, and the fluorescence is extracted to the outside very efficiently. It becomes possible.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 70 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 70 when excitation light is incident on the phosphor layer 12 from the excitation light source 11, light is emitted from the phosphor layer 12 isotropically, that is, with equal energy in any direction.
- the luminance viewing angle characteristic of this light is such that the larger the viewing angle is, the larger the viewing angle is between 0 ° and 80 °, since the viewing angle (the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction) is related to the solid angle.
- the viewing angle the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction
- this light enters the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and is scattered in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 to change the traveling direction of the light.
- the optical path length in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and light incident in an oblique direction.
- the latter light is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer 31 with respect to the former.
- a light emission profile in which the luminance increases as the viewing angle increases is changed to a light emission profile in which at least the luminance in the 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer 31. be able to.
- a light-emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction can be obtained.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided on the side surface of the phosphor layer 12, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 12, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and the fluorescence
- the fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the body layer 12 is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 on the side surface of the phosphor layer 12, it is possible to efficiently extract the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer 12 to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer 12, the opposite side (rear side) of the phosphor layer 12 to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component that emits light is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer 12 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the incident surface side of the phosphor layer 12 where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer 12 can be extracted to the outside very efficiently. .
- the phosphor layer 12 is on the opposite side (back side) to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent components that emit light the fluorescent light incident on the interface is reflected at an angle greater than or equal to the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle.
- the reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 71 between the phosphor layer 12 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer 12 can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device of a sixth embodiment. 8, the same components as those of the light emitting device 30 shown in FIG. 3 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
- the light-emitting device 80 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a substrate 13 that is disposed opposite to the excitation light source and on which a phosphor layer 12 that is excited by the excitation light and emits fluorescence is formed. At least the phosphor layer 12 along the stacking direction of the substrate 13 and the light distribution adjustment layer 31 that is formed between the phosphor layers 12 and changes the emission direction of at least fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer.
- a low refractive index layer 81 with a low refractive index It is schematic configuration.
- the low refractive index layer 81 is provided between the light distribution adjusting layer 31 and the phosphor layer 12, and the critical angle at the interface between the phosphor layer 31 and the low refractive index layer 81 among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer.
- the critical angle at the interface between the phosphor layer 31 and the low refractive index layer 81 among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer.
- it is incident on the substrate 13 from the phosphor layer 12 but cannot be taken out from the substrate.
- It is a layer characterized by suppressing the component which carries out.
- a fluorescent component directed to the front side of the light emitting device 80 is a low refractive index provided between the light distribution control layer 31 and the phosphor layer 12.
- the layer 81 can be efficiently taken out, and the light emission efficiency can be improved.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 80 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 70 when excitation light is incident on the phosphor layer 12 from the excitation light source 11, light is emitted from the phosphor layer 12 isotropically, that is, with equal energy in any direction.
- the luminance viewing angle characteristic of this light is such that the larger the viewing angle is, the larger the viewing angle is between 0 ° and 80 °, since the viewing angle (the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction) is related to the solid angle. Has a high profile. Then, this light enters the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and is scattered in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 to change the traveling direction of the light.
- the optical path length in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and light incident in an oblique direction. Therefore, the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer 31.
- a light emission profile in which the luminance increases as the viewing angle increases is changed to a light emission profile in which at least the luminance in the 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer 31.
- a light-emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction can be obtained.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided on the side surface of the phosphor layer 12, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 12, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and the fluorescence
- the fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the body layer 12 is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side. That is, by providing the light-reflective barrier 51 on the side surface of the phosphor layer 12, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer 12 can be efficiently extracted outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer 12, the opposite side (rear side) of the phosphor layer 12 to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component that emits light is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer 12 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the incident surface side of the phosphor layer 12 where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer 12 can be extracted to the outside very efficiently. .
- the phosphor layer 12 is on the opposite side (back side) to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent light incident on the interface is reflected at an angle greater than or equal to the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced. Therefore, when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle. The reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 71 between the phosphor layer 12 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer 12 can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the low refractive index layer 81 is provided between the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and the phosphor layer 12, among the fluorescent components that emit light on the light extraction side of the phosphor layer 12, fluorescence
- the fluorescence component emitted from the phosphor layer 31 at a shallow angle is prevented from entering the substrate. be able to. That is, it is possible to suppress a loss component that is incident on the substrate 13 but is reflected at the interface between the substrate 13 and the outside and cannot be extracted to the outside and is guided in the substrate 13. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 81 between the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and the phosphor layer 12, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer 12 can be extracted outside without loss.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device according to a seventh embodiment.
- the light-emitting device 90 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a first phosphor layer 91 that is arranged to face the excitation light source, emits fluorescence when excited by the excitation light, and a second phosphor layer 92.
- the light distribution adjusting layer 31 that changes the light intensity, the light-reflective barrier 51 formed on the substrate 13 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, and the incident surfaces on which the excitation light is incident on the phosphor layers 91 to 93
- the light distribution layer 31 and the fluorescence Between the layers 91-93 are schematic configuration of a small low-refractive index layer 81. refractive index than the phosphor layer 91-93.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 90 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 90 when excitation light is incident on the first phosphor layer 91, the second phosphor layer 92, and the third phosphor layer 93 from the excitation light source 11, isotropic from each phosphor layer, that is, Light is emitted with equal energy in any direction.
- the light distribution profile of fluorescence extracted from the phosphor layer to the outside often differs depending on the type of phosphor.
- the refractive index of the phosphor material or resin material constituting the phosphor layer is different for each phosphor layer
- the refraction angle at which the fluorescence extracted outside is refracted at the interface between the phosphor layer and the outside is the phosphor layer It depends on. That is, the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted to the outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the phosphor layer is made of an inorganic phosphor material, the light emission characteristics vary depending on the particle size and shape of the phosphor particles.
- the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the incident fluorescence changes in the light distribution adjusting layer 31 due to light scattering.
- the optical path length in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and light incident in an oblique direction. Therefore, the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer 31.
- a light emission profile in which the luminance increases as the viewing angle increases has a light emission profile in which the luminance in at least 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer 31.
- the fluorescent component is extracted to the outside as light emission 94 from the first phosphor layer 91, light emission 95 from the second phosphor layer 92, and light emission 96 from the third phosphor layer 93.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and The fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the phosphor layer is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side. That is, by providing the light-reflective barrier 51 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be efficiently extracted to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer, light is emitted on the opposite side (back side) of the phosphor layer to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component to be reflected is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the side of the phosphor layer where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle.
- the reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 71 between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the fluorescent components emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 93 can be taken out very efficiently to the outside. It becomes possible.
- the fluorescent component that emits light to the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93 is provided.
- the fluorescent component that emits light to the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93 is provided.
- the fluorescent component emitted at a shallow angle from the phosphor layer from entering the substrate. can do. That is, although it is incident on the substrate, it is reflected at the interface between the substrate and the outside and cannot be taken out to the outside, and a loss component that is guided in the substrate can be suppressed. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 81 between the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 93 can be extracted outside without loss. Become.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device according to an eighth embodiment.
- the light-emitting device 100 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a first phosphor layer 91 that is disposed opposite to the excitation light source, emits fluorescence when excited by the excitation light, and a second phosphor layer 92.
- the emission direction of fluorescence emitted from at least the phosphor layers 91 to 93 formed between the substrate 13 on which the third phosphor layer 93 is formed, and the substrate 13 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93.
- the light distribution adjusting layer 31 includes the barrier 51 and the substrate 13. It is formed so as to spread upward.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 100 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 100 when excitation light is incident on the first phosphor layer 91, the second phosphor layer 92, and the third phosphor layer 93 from the excitation light source 11, isotropic from each phosphor layer, that is, Light is emitted with equal energy in any direction.
- the light distribution profile of fluorescence extracted from the phosphor layer to the outside often differs depending on the type of phosphor.
- the refractive index of the phosphor material or resin material constituting the phosphor layer is different for each phosphor layer
- the refraction angle at which the fluorescence extracted outside is refracted at the interface between the phosphor layer and the outside is the phosphor layer It depends on. That is, the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted to the outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the phosphor layer is made of an inorganic phosphor material, the light emission characteristics vary depending on the particle size and shape of the phosphor particles.
- the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the incident fluorescence changes in the light distribution adjusting layer 31 due to light scattering.
- the optical path length in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and light incident in an oblique direction. Therefore, the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer 31.
- a light emission profile in which the luminance increases as the viewing angle increases has a light emission profile in which the luminance in at least 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer 31.
- the fluorescent component is extracted to the outside as light emission 94 from the first phosphor layer 91, light emission 95 from the second phosphor layer 92, and light emission 96 from the third phosphor layer 93.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and The fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the phosphor layer is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side. That is, by providing the light-reflective barrier 51 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be efficiently extracted to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer, light is emitted on the opposite side (back side) of the phosphor layer to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component to be reflected is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the side of the phosphor layer where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced. Therefore, when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle. The reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled.
- the fluorescent components emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 93 can be taken out very efficiently to the outside. It becomes possible.
- the low refractive index layer 81 is provided between the light distribution adjusting layer 31 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, the fluorescent component that emits light to the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93 is provided.
- the fluorescence incident on the interface at a critical angle greater than the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, it is possible to suppress the fluorescence component emitted at a shallow angle from the phosphor layer from entering the substrate. can do. That is, although it is incident on the substrate, it is reflected at the interface between the substrate and the outside and cannot be taken out to the outside, and a loss component that is guided in the substrate can be suppressed. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 81 between the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 93 can be extracted outside without loss. Become.
- the light distribution adjusting layer 31 is formed between the barrier layers 51 on the side surfaces of the phosphor layers 91 to 93, the phosphor layers 91 to 93 laterally extend from the phosphor layers 91 to 93.
- a part of the fluorescent component can be backscattered (reflected) by the light distribution adjusting layer 31.
- the reflecting ability of the barrier can be enhanced through the light distribution adjusting layer 13, and light incident on the barrier 51 can be prevented from passing through the barrier 51 and entering an adjacent pixel. it can.
- the light distribution adjustment layer is partitioned by a barrier when viewed from the light extraction direction, it is possible to prevent light from entering the adjacent pixels through the light distribution adjustment layer.
- FIG. 11 is a schematic sectional view showing a light emitting device according to the ninth embodiment.
- the light-emitting device 110 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a first phosphor layer 91 that is arranged to face the excitation light source, emits fluorescence when excited by the excitation light, and a second phosphor layer 92.
- a light distribution adjustment layer 112 which is formed between the light distribution adjustment layer 111 to be changed and the second phosphor layer 92 and which changes the emission direction of at least the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 92, and a third phosphor Formed on the substrate 13 between at least the light distribution adjusting layer 113 that changes the emission direction of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 93 and between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other.
- Light-reflective barrier 51 and fluorescence In the layers 91 to 93, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 formed on the incident surface side on which excitation light is incident, and between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the phosphor layer 91 Low refractive index layer 71 having a refractive index smaller than that of 93, and between the light distribution control layers 111 to 113 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, a low refractive index having a refractive index lower than that of the phosphor layers 91 to 93.
- the refractive index layer 81 is generally configured.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 110 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 110 when excitation light is incident on the first phosphor layer 91, the second phosphor layer 92, and the third phosphor layer 93 from the excitation light source 11, isotropic from each phosphor layer, that is, Light is emitted with equal energy in any direction.
- the light distribution profile of fluorescence extracted from the phosphor layer to the outside often differs depending on the type of phosphor.
- the refractive index of the phosphor material or resin material constituting the phosphor layer is different for each phosphor layer
- the refraction angle at which the fluorescence extracted outside is refracted at the interface between the phosphor layer and the outside is the phosphor layer It depends on. That is, the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted to the outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the phosphor layer is made of an inorganic phosphor material, the light emission characteristics vary depending on the particle size and shape of the phosphor particles.
- the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the light emission profiles are different from each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the first fluorescent layer 91, the fluorescent component emitted from the second fluorescent layer 92, and the fluorescent component emitted from the third fluorescent layer 93, respectively.
- the incident fluorescence changes in the light traveling direction in the light distribution adjusting layer due to light scattering.
- the light path length in the light distribution adjustment layer is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer and light incident in an oblique direction.
- the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer.
- the fluorescence having a light emission profile in which the luminance is higher as the viewing angle is larger, and the luminance in at least 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer.
- the components are extracted to the outside as light emission 94 from the first phosphor layer 91, light emission 95 from the second phosphor layer 92, and light emission 96 from the third phosphor layer 93. As a result, it is possible to obtain a light emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction and does not change color when viewed from any direction.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and The fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the phosphor layer is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side. That is, by providing the light-reflective barrier 51 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be efficiently extracted to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer, light is emitted on the opposite side (back side) of the phosphor layer to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component to be reflected is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the side of the phosphor layer where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the low refractive index layer 71 is provided between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, light is emitted from the phosphor layer opposite to the light extraction side (back side).
- the fluorescent components the fluorescent light incident on the interface is reflected at an angle greater than or equal to the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced. Therefore, when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle.
- the reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 71 between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently. .
- the low refractive index layer 81 is provided between the light distribution adjusting layers 111 to 113 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, light is emitted to the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93.
- the fluorescent component emitted at a shallow angle from the phosphor layer is incident on the substrate by reflecting the fluorescence incident on the interface at a critical angle greater than the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer. Can be suppressed. That is, although it is incident on the substrate, it is reflected at the interface between the substrate and the outside and cannot be taken out to the outside, and a loss component that is guided in the substrate can be suppressed.
- the light distribution adjustment layer is partitioned by a barrier when viewed from the light extraction direction, so that light can be prevented from entering the adjacent pixels by being guided through the light distribution adjustment layer. .
- the particle size parameter ⁇ greatly affects the scattering characteristics.
- forward scattering and side scattering are dominant, and a so-called Mie scattering region in which little scattering occurs in the back is obtained.
- the particle size parameter ⁇ is determined by the particle size of the particle and the wavelength of light incident on the particle, that is, the wavelength of fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer. For example, when it is desired to scatter 600 nm fluorescence forward and laterally by the light distribution adjusting layer, the particle size of the particles may be set so that the particle size parameter ⁇ 1.
- FIG. 12 is a schematic sectional view showing a light emitting device according to the tenth embodiment.
- the light emitting device 120 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a first phosphor layer 91 that is disposed to face the excitation light source, and that emits fluorescence when excited by the excitation light, and a second phosphor layer 92.
- the light distribution adjusting layer 31 that changes the light intensity, the light-reflective barrier 51 formed on the substrate 13 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, and the incident surfaces on which the excitation light is incident on the phosphor layers 91 to 93
- the light distribution layer 31 and the firefly A low refractive index layer 81 having a refractive index smaller than that of the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and a light absorption layer 121 formed between the light distribution adjusting layer 31 and the barrier 51, respectively, between the body layers 91 to 93. It is roughly composed.
- the light absorption layer 121 is made of a light-absorbing material, and is formed corresponding to a region between adjacent pixels.
- the light absorption layer 121 can improve display contrast.
- the film thickness of the light absorption layer 121 is usually about 100 nm to 100 ⁇ m, preferably 100 nm to 10 ⁇ m. Further, in order to efficiently extract light emitted from the side surface of the phosphor layer 13 to the outside, it is preferable that the thickness of the light absorption layer 121 is smaller than the thickness of the phosphor layers 91 to 93.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 120 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 120 when excitation light is incident on the first phosphor layer 91, the second phosphor layer 92, and the third phosphor layer 93 from the excitation light source 11, isotropic from each phosphor layer, that is, Light is emitted with equal energy in any direction.
- the light distribution profile of fluorescence extracted from the phosphor layer to the outside often differs depending on the type of phosphor.
- the refractive index of the phosphor material or resin material constituting the phosphor layer is different for each phosphor layer
- the refraction angle at which the fluorescence extracted outside is refracted at the interface between the phosphor layer and the outside is the phosphor layer It depends on. That is, the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted to the outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the phosphor layer is made of an inorganic phosphor material, the light emission characteristics vary depending on the particle size and shape of the phosphor particles.
- the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the incident fluorescence changes in the light distribution adjusting layer 31 due to light scattering.
- the optical path length in the light distribution adjustment layer 31 is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and light incident in an oblique direction. Therefore, the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer 31.
- a light emission profile in which the luminance increases as the viewing angle increases has a light emission profile in which the luminance in at least 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer 31.
- the fluorescent component is extracted to the outside as light emission 94 from the first phosphor layer 91, light emission 95 from the second phosphor layer 92, and light emission 96 from the third phosphor layer 93.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and The fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the phosphor layer is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side. That is, by providing the light-reflective barrier 51 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be efficiently extracted to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer, light is emitted on the opposite side (back side) of the phosphor layer to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component to be reflected is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the side of the phosphor layer where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle.
- the reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 71 between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the fluorescent components emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 93 can be taken out very efficiently to the outside. It becomes possible.
- the fluorescent component that emits light to the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93 is provided.
- the fluorescent component that emits light to the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93 is provided.
- the fluorescent component emitted at a shallow angle from the phosphor layer from entering the substrate. can do. That is, although it is incident on the substrate, it is reflected at the interface between the substrate and the outside and cannot be taken out to the outside, and a loss component that is guided in the substrate can be suppressed. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 81 between the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 93 can be extracted outside without loss. Become.
- the phosphor layer 91 is provided. It is possible to prevent the fluorescence emitted from .about.93 from entering the adjacent phosphor layer by light absorption, and the display contrast can be improved.
- FIG. 13 is a schematic sectional view showing a light emitting device according to the eleventh embodiment.
- the light-emitting device 130 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a first phosphor layer 91 that is disposed to face the excitation light source, emits fluorescence when excited by the excitation light, and a second phosphor layer 92.
- the emission direction of the fluorescence emitted from at least the phosphor layer 91 formed between the substrate 13 on which the third phosphor layer 93 is formed, the substrate 13 and the first phosphor layer 91 is defined.
- a light distribution adjustment layer 112 that is formed between the light distribution adjustment layer 111 to be changed and the second phosphor layer 92 and changes the emission direction of at least the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 92, and a third phosphor. Formed on the substrate 13 between at least the light distribution adjusting layer 113 that changes the emission direction of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 93 and between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other.
- Light-reflective barrier 51 and fluorescence In the layers 91 to 93, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 formed on the incident surface side on which excitation light is incident, and between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the phosphor layer 91 Low refractive index layer 71 having a refractive index smaller than that of 93, and between the light distribution control layers 111 to 113 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, a low refractive index having a refractive index lower than that of the phosphor layers 91 to 93.
- a light absorbing layer 121 is formed between the refractive index layer 81 and the light distribution adjusting layers 111 to 113 adjacent to each other and between the substrate 13 and the barrier 51, respectively.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 130 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 130 when excitation light is incident on the first phosphor layer 91, the second phosphor layer 92, and the third phosphor layer 93 from the excitation light source 11, isotropic from each phosphor layer, that is, Light is emitted with equal energy in any direction.
- the light distribution profile of fluorescence extracted from the phosphor layer to the outside often differs depending on the type of phosphor.
- the refractive index of the phosphor material or resin material constituting the phosphor layer is different for each phosphor layer
- the refraction angle at which the fluorescence extracted outside is refracted at the interface between the phosphor layer and the outside is the phosphor layer It depends on. That is, the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted to the outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the phosphor layer is made of an inorganic phosphor material, the light emission characteristics vary depending on the particle size and shape of the phosphor particles.
- the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the light emission profiles are different from each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the first fluorescent layer 91, the fluorescent component emitted from the second fluorescent layer 92, and the fluorescent component emitted from the third fluorescent layer 93, respectively.
- the incident fluorescence changes in the light traveling direction in the light distribution adjusting layer due to light scattering.
- the light path length in the light distribution adjustment layer is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer and light incident in an oblique direction.
- the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer.
- the fluorescence having a light emission profile in which the luminance is higher as the viewing angle is larger, and the luminance in at least 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer.
- the components are extracted to the outside as light emission 94 from the first phosphor layer 91, light emission 95 from the second phosphor layer 92, and light emission 96 from the third phosphor layer 93. As a result, it is possible to obtain a light emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction and does not change color when viewed from any direction.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and The fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the phosphor layer is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side. That is, by providing the light-reflective barrier 51 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be efficiently extracted to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer, light is emitted on the opposite side (back side) of the phosphor layer to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component to be reflected is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the side of the phosphor layer where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the low refractive index layer 71 is provided between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, light is emitted from the phosphor layer opposite to the light extraction side (back side).
- the fluorescent components the fluorescent light incident on the interface is reflected at an angle greater than or equal to the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced. Therefore, when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle.
- the reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 71 between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently. .
- the fluorescent component that emits light to the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93 is provided.
- the fluorescent component that emits light to the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93 is provided.
- the fluorescence incident on the interface at a critical angle greater than the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, it is possible to suppress the fluorescence component emitted at a shallow angle from the phosphor layer from entering the substrate. can do. That is, although it is incident on the substrate, it is reflected at the interface between the substrate and the outside and cannot be taken out to the outside, and a loss component that is guided in the substrate can be suppressed.
- the fluorescent components emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 93 can be taken out without loss. It becomes possible.
- the light distribution adjustment layer is partitioned by the light absorption layer as viewed from the light extraction direction, the light distribution adjustment layer is guided to prevent light from entering the adjacent pixels. You can also.
- the light absorption layers 121 formed between the barrier 51 and the substrate 13 are provided between the light distribution adjustment layers adjacent to each other, the phosphor layers 91 to 93 are provided. It is possible to prevent the fluorescence emitted from the light from entering the adjacent phosphor layer by light absorption, and the display contrast can be improved.
- the particle size parameter ⁇ greatly affects the scattering characteristics.
- the particle size parameter ⁇ is determined by the particle size of the particle and the wavelength of light incident on the particle, that is, the wavelength of fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer. For example, when it is desired to scatter 600 nm fluorescence forward and laterally by the light distribution adjusting layer, the particle size of the particles may be set so that the particle size parameter ⁇ 1.
- FIG. 14 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device according to the tenth embodiment.
- the light-emitting device 140 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a first phosphor layer 91 that is arranged to face the excitation light source and that is excited by the excitation light to emit fluorescence, and a second phosphor layer 92.
- the emission direction of the fluorescence emitted from at least the phosphor layer 91 formed between the substrate 13 on which the third phosphor layer 93 is formed, the substrate 13 and the first phosphor layer 91 is defined.
- a light distribution adjustment layer 112 that is formed between the light distribution adjustment layer 111 to be changed and the second phosphor layer 92 and changes the emission direction of at least the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 92, and a third phosphor. Formed on the substrate 13 between at least the light distribution adjusting layer 113 that changes the emission direction of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 93 and between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other.
- Light-reflective barrier 51 and fluorescence In the layers 91 to 93, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 formed on the incident surface side on which excitation light is incident, and between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the phosphor layer 91 Low refractive index layer 71 having a refractive index smaller than that of 93, and light distribution control layers 111 to 113 and phosphor layers 91 to 93 having a refractive index lower than that of phosphor layers 91 to 93.
- a light absorption layer 121 formed between the substrate 13 and the barrier 51, and an excitation light incident surface of the barrier 51 is formed roughly.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 140 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 140 when excitation light is incident on the first phosphor layer 91, the second phosphor layer 92, and the third phosphor layer 93 from the excitation light source 11, isotropic from each phosphor layer, that is, Light is emitted with equal energy in any direction.
- the light distribution profile of fluorescence extracted from the phosphor layer to the outside often differs depending on the type of phosphor.
- the refractive index of the phosphor material or resin material constituting the phosphor layer is different for each phosphor layer
- the refraction angle at which the fluorescence extracted outside is refracted at the interface between the phosphor layer and the outside is the phosphor layer It depends on. That is, the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted to the outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the phosphor layer is made of an inorganic phosphor material, the light emission characteristics vary depending on the particle size and shape of the phosphor particles.
- the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the light emission profiles are different from each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the first fluorescent layer 91, the fluorescent component emitted from the second fluorescent layer 92, and the fluorescent component emitted from the third fluorescent layer 93, respectively.
- the incident fluorescence changes in the light traveling direction in the light distribution adjusting layer due to light scattering.
- the light path length in the light distribution adjustment layer is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer and light incident in an oblique direction.
- the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer.
- the fluorescence having a light emission profile in which the luminance is higher as the viewing angle is larger, and the luminance in at least 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer.
- the components are extracted to the outside as light emission 94 from the first phosphor layer 91, light emission 95 from the second phosphor layer 92, and light emission 96 from the third phosphor layer 93. As a result, it is possible to obtain a light emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction and does not change color when viewed from any direction.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and The fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the phosphor layer is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side. That is, by providing the light-reflective barrier 51 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be efficiently extracted to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer, light is emitted on the opposite side (back side) of the phosphor layer to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component to be reflected is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the side of the phosphor layer where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the low refractive index layer 71 is provided between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, light is emitted from the phosphor layer opposite to the light extraction side (back side).
- the fluorescent components the fluorescent light incident on the interface is reflected at an angle greater than or equal to the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced. Therefore, when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle.
- the reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 71 between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently. .
- the low refractive index layer 81 is provided between the light distribution adjusting layers 111 to 113 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, light is emitted to the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93.
- the fluorescent component emitted at a shallow angle from the phosphor layer is incident on the substrate by reflecting the fluorescence incident on the interface at a critical angle greater than the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer. Can be suppressed. That is, although it is incident on the substrate, it is reflected at the interface between the substrate and the outside and cannot be taken out to the outside, and a loss component that is guided in the substrate can be suppressed. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 81 between the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 93 can be extracted outside without loss. Become.
- the light distribution adjustment layer is partitioned by the light absorption layer as viewed from the light extraction direction, the light distribution adjustment layer is guided to prevent light from entering the adjacent pixels. You can also.
- the light absorption layers 121 formed between the barrier 51 and the substrate 13 are provided between the light distribution adjustment layers adjacent to each other, the phosphor layers 91 to 93 are provided. It is possible to prevent the fluorescence emitted from the light from entering the adjacent phosphor layer by light absorption, and the display contrast can be improved.
- the excitation light since the second light absorption layer 141 formed on the excitation light incident surface of the barrier 51 is provided, the excitation light does not enter the phosphor layer and hits the bottom surface of the barrier 51 and is reflected. Thus, it is possible to prevent the penetration of the adjacent phosphor layers by light absorption, and it is possible to prevent the display contrast from being lowered.
- the particle size parameter ⁇ greatly affects the scattering characteristics.
- the particle size parameter ⁇ is determined by the particle size of the particle and the wavelength of light incident on the particle, that is, the wavelength of fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer. For example, when it is desired to scatter 600 nm fluorescence forward and laterally by the light distribution adjusting layer, the particle size of the particles may be set so that the particle size parameter ⁇ 1.
- FIG. 15 is a schematic sectional view showing a light emitting device according to the thirteenth embodiment.
- the light-emitting device 150 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a first phosphor layer 91 that is disposed opposite to the excitation light source, emits fluorescence when excited by the excitation light, and a second phosphor layer 92.
- the emission direction of the fluorescence emitted from at least the phosphor layer 91 formed between the substrate 13 on which the third phosphor layer 93 is formed, the substrate 13 and the first phosphor layer 91 is defined.
- a light distribution adjustment layer 112 that is formed between the light distribution adjustment layer 111 to be changed and the second phosphor layer 92 and changes the emission direction of at least the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 92, and a third phosphor. Formed on the substrate 13 between at least the light distribution adjusting layer 113 that changes the emission direction of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer 93 and between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other.
- Light-reflective barrier 51 and fluorescence In the layers 91 to 93, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 formed on the incident surface side on which excitation light is incident, and between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the phosphor layer 91 Low refractive index layer 71 having a refractive index smaller than that of 93, and light distribution control layers 111 to 113 and phosphor layers 91 to 93 having a refractive index lower than that of phosphor layers 91 to 93.
- a light absorption layer 121 formed between the substrate 13 and the barrier 51, and an excitation light incident surface of the barrier 51 Of the second light absorption layer 141 formed on the substrate, the substrate 13, the first color filter 151 formed between the first light distribution control layer 111, and the second light distribution adjustment layer 112.
- a conventional color filter can be used as the color filter.
- the color filter By providing the color filter, the color purity of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer can be increased, and the color reproduction range can be expanded.
- the color filter provided in each phosphor layer absorbs the excitation light component contained in the external light, so it is possible to reduce or prevent the phosphor layer from emitting light due to the external light, reducing the decrease in contrast Or it can be prevented.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 150 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 150 when excitation light is incident on the first phosphor layer 91, the second phosphor layer 92, and the third phosphor layer 93 from the excitation light source 11, isotropic from each phosphor layer, that is, Light is emitted with equal energy in any direction.
- the light distribution profile of fluorescence extracted from the phosphor layer to the outside often differs depending on the type of phosphor.
- the refractive index of the phosphor material or resin material constituting the phosphor layer is different for each phosphor layer
- the refraction angle at which the fluorescence extracted outside is refracted at the interface between the phosphor layer and the outside is the phosphor layer It depends on. That is, the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted to the outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the phosphor layer is made of an inorganic phosphor material, the light emission characteristics vary depending on the particle size and shape of the phosphor particles.
- the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the light emission profiles are different from each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the first fluorescent layer 91, the fluorescent component emitted from the second fluorescent layer 92, and the fluorescent component emitted from the third fluorescent layer 93, respectively.
- the incident fluorescence changes in the light traveling direction in the light distribution adjusting layer due to light scattering.
- the light path length in the light distribution adjustment layer is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer and light incident in an oblique direction.
- the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer.
- the fluorescence having a light emission profile in which the luminance is higher as the viewing angle is larger, and the luminance in at least 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer.
- the components are extracted to the outside as light emission 94 from the first phosphor layer 91, light emission 95 from the second phosphor layer 92, and light emission 96 from the third phosphor layer 93. As a result, it is possible to obtain a light emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction and does not change color when viewed from any direction.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and The fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the phosphor layer is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side. That is, by providing the light-reflective barrier 51 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be efficiently extracted to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer, light is emitted on the opposite side (back side) of the phosphor layer to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component to be reflected is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the side of the phosphor layer where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the low refractive index layer 71 is provided between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, light is emitted from the phosphor layer opposite to the light extraction side (back side).
- the fluorescent components the fluorescent light incident on the interface is reflected at an angle greater than or equal to the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced. Therefore, when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle.
- the reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 71 between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently. .
- the low refractive index layer 81 is provided between the light distribution adjusting layers 111 to 113 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, light is emitted to the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93.
- the fluorescent component emitted at a shallow angle from the phosphor layer is incident on the substrate by reflecting the fluorescence incident on the interface at a critical angle greater than the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer. Can be suppressed. That is, although it is incident on the substrate, it is reflected at the interface between the substrate and the outside and cannot be taken out to the outside, and a loss component that is guided in the substrate can be suppressed. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 81 between the light distribution adjustment layer 31 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 93 can be extracted outside without loss. Become.
- the light distribution adjustment layer is partitioned by the light absorption layer as viewed from the light extraction direction, the light distribution adjustment layer is guided to prevent light from entering the adjacent pixels. You can also.
- the light absorption layers 121 formed between the barrier 51 and the substrate 13 are provided between the light distribution adjustment layers adjacent to each other, the phosphor layers 91 to 93 are provided. It is possible to prevent the fluorescence emitted from the light from entering the adjacent phosphor layer by light absorption, and the display contrast can be improved.
- the second light absorption layer 141 formed on the excitation light incident surface of the barrier 51 since the second light absorption layer 141 formed on the excitation light incident surface of the barrier 51 is provided, the excitation light does not enter the phosphor layer and hits the bottom surface of the barrier 51 and is reflected. Thus, it is possible to prevent the penetration of the adjacent phosphor layers by light absorption, and it is possible to prevent the display contrast from being lowered.
- the color filter formed on each phosphor layer absorbs the excitation light component contained in the external light, it is possible to reduce or prevent light emission of the phosphor layer due to the external light, resulting in a decrease in contrast. Can be reduced or prevented. Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the excitation light that is not absorbed by the phosphor layer from leaking to the outside, it is possible to prevent the color purity from being deteriorated due to color mixture by light emission from the phosphor layer and the excitation light. it can.
- the particle size parameter ⁇ greatly affects the scattering characteristics.
- the particle size parameter ⁇ is determined by the particle size of the particle and the wavelength of light incident on the particle, that is, the wavelength of fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer. For example, when it is desired to scatter 600 nm fluorescence forward and laterally by the light distribution adjusting layer, the particle size of the particles may be set so that the particle size parameter ⁇ 1.
- FIG. 16 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device according to a fourteenth embodiment.
- the light-emitting device 160 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a first phosphor layer 91 that is disposed to face the excitation light source, emits fluorescence when excited by the excitation light, and a second phosphor layer 92.
- a light distribution adjusting layer 111 that changes the emission direction of the fluorescence emitted from the layer 91 and a distribution that changes the emission direction of the fluorescence emitted from at least the phosphor layer 92 formed between the second phosphor layer 92.
- And light distribution adjustment layer 1 1, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 formed on the incident surface side on which excitation light is incident, the phosphor layers 91 to 92, the light distribution adjustment layer 161, and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, A low refractive index layer 71 having a lower refractive index than the body layers 91 to 92, between the light distribution control layers 111 to 112 and the phosphor layers 91 to 92, and between the light distribution adjustment layer 161 and the color filter 153. Between the low refractive index layer 81 having a smaller refractive index than the phosphor layers 91 to 92 and the light distribution adjusting layers 111 to 112 and 161 adjacent to each other, between the substrate 13 and the barrier 51.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 160 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 160 when excitation light is incident on the first phosphor layer 91 and the second phosphor layer 92 from the excitation light source 11, they are isotropic from each phosphor layer, that is, with equal energy in any direction. The light is emitted.
- the light distribution profile of fluorescence extracted from the phosphor layer to the outside often differs depending on the type of phosphor.
- the refractive index of the phosphor material or resin material constituting the phosphor layer is different for each phosphor layer
- the refraction angle at which the fluorescence extracted outside is refracted at the interface between the phosphor layer and the outside is the phosphor layer It depends on. That is, the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted to the outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the phosphor layer is made of an inorganic phosphor material, the light emission characteristics vary depending on the particle size and shape of the phosphor particles.
- the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the fluorescent component emitted from the first fluorescent layer 91 and the fluorescent component emitted from the second fluorescent layer 92 having different emission profiles are incident on the light distribution adjustment layer 111 and the light distribution adjustment layer 112, respectively, the incident fluorescence In the light distribution adjusting layer, the traveling direction of light changes due to light scattering.
- the light path length in the light distribution adjustment layer is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer and light incident in an oblique direction. Therefore, the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer.
- the fluorescence having a light emission profile in which the luminance is higher as the viewing angle is larger, and the luminance in at least 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer.
- the components are extracted to the outside as light emission 94 from the first phosphor layer 91 and light emission 95 from the second phosphor layer 92. As a result, it is possible to obtain a light emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction and does not change color when viewed from any direction.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and The fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the phosphor layer is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side. That is, by providing the light-reflective barrier 51 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be efficiently extracted to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer, light is emitted on the opposite side (back side) of the phosphor layer to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component to be reflected is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the side of the phosphor layer where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the low refractive index layer 71 is provided between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, light is emitted from the phosphor layer opposite to the light extraction side (back side).
- the fluorescent components the fluorescent light incident on the interface is reflected at an angle greater than or equal to the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced. Therefore, when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle.
- the reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 71 between the phosphor layers 91 to 92 and the light distribution adjusting layer 161 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be very efficiently externally provided. It can be taken out.
- the low refractive index layer 81 is provided between the substrate 13 and the phosphor layers 91 to 92 and the light distribution control layer 161, the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 92 is provided.
- the fluorescent component that emits light the fluorescent component that is emitted at a shallow angle from the phosphor layer is incident on the substrate by reflecting the fluorescence incident on the interface at a critical angle greater than the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer. Can be suppressed. That is, although it is incident on the substrate, it is reflected at the interface between the substrate and the outside and cannot be taken out to the outside, and a loss component that is guided in the substrate can be suppressed. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 81 between the substrate 13 and the phosphor layers 91 to 92, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 92 can be extracted outside without loss.
- the light distribution adjustment layer is partitioned by the light absorption layer as viewed from the light extraction direction, the light distribution adjustment layer is guided to prevent light from entering the adjacent pixels. You can also.
- the light absorption layers 121 formed between the barrier 51 and the substrate 13 are provided between the light distribution adjustment layers adjacent to each other, the phosphor layers 91 to 92 are provided. It is possible to prevent the fluorescence emitted from the light or the light emitted from the light distribution adjustment layer 161 from entering the adjacent phosphor layers 91 to 92 or the light distribution adjustment layer 161 by light absorption. Can be improved.
- the excitation light is the phosphor layers 91 to 92 or the light distribution adjustment. It is possible to prevent the light from entering the adjacent phosphor layers 91 to 92 or the light distribution adjusting layer 161 by light absorption without being incident on the layer 161 and being reflected by the bottom surface of the barrier 51, thereby reducing the display contrast. Can be prevented.
- the color filter formed on each phosphor layer absorbs the excitation light component contained in the external light, it is possible to reduce or prevent light emission of the phosphor layer due to the external light, resulting in a decrease in contrast. Can be reduced or prevented. Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the excitation light that is not absorbed by the phosphor layer from leaking to the outside, it is possible to prevent the color purity from being deteriorated due to color mixture by light emission from the phosphor layer and the excitation light. it can.
- the third phosphor layer 93 and the third light distribution adjustment layer 113 in the thirteenth embodiment of the previous section are configured by only the light distribution adjustment layer 161, so that it is simple.
- a light emitting device can be formed by the process.
- the thickness of the light distribution adjusting layer can be increased by the thickness of the phosphor layers 91 to 92 of other pixels, so that the light distribution profile can be easily adjusted.
- the particle size parameter ⁇ greatly affects the scattering characteristics.
- the particle size parameter ⁇ is determined by the particle size of the particle and the wavelength of light incident on the particle, that is, the wavelength of fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer. For example, when it is desired to scatter 600 nm fluorescence forward and laterally by the light distribution adjusting layer, the particle size of the particles may be set so that the particle size parameter ⁇ 1.
- FIG. 17 is a schematic sectional view showing a light emitting device according to the fifteenth embodiment.
- the light-emitting device 170 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a first phosphor layer 91 that is disposed opposite to the excitation light source, emits fluorescence when excited by the excitation light, and a second phosphor layer 92.
- the selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the phosphor layers 91 to 93, and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 the low refractive index layer 71 having a refractive index smaller than that of the phosphor layers 91 to 93, and the light distribution control.
- light emission in the light emitting device 170 will be described.
- the light emitting device 170 when excitation light is incident on the first phosphor layer 91, the second phosphor layer 92, and the third phosphor layer 93 from the excitation light source 11, isotropic from each phosphor layer, that is, Light is emitted with equal energy in any direction.
- the light distribution profile of fluorescence extracted from the phosphor layer to the outside often differs depending on the type of phosphor.
- the refractive index of the phosphor material or resin material constituting the phosphor layer is different for each phosphor layer
- the refraction angle at which the fluorescence extracted outside is refracted at the interface between the phosphor layer and the outside is the phosphor layer It depends on. That is, the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted to the outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the phosphor layer is made of an inorganic phosphor material, the light emission characteristics vary depending on the particle size and shape of the phosphor particles.
- the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- a fluorescent component emitted from the first fluorescent layer 91, a fluorescent component emitted from the second fluorescent layer 92, and a fluorescent component emitted from the third fluorescent layer 93, each having a different emission profile, are arranged via the substrate 13.
- the incident fluorescence changes in the light distribution adjustment layer due to light scattering in the light distribution adjustment layer.
- the light path length in the light distribution adjustment layer is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer and light incident in an oblique direction. Therefore, the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer.
- the fluorescence having a light emission profile in which the luminance is higher as the viewing angle is larger, and the luminance in at least 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer.
- the components are extracted to the outside as light emission 94 from the first phosphor layer 91, light emission 95 from the second phosphor layer 92, and light emission 96 from the third phosphor layer 93. As a result, it is possible to obtain a light emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction and does not change color when viewed from any direction.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and The fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the phosphor layer is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side. That is, by providing the light-reflective barrier 51 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be efficiently extracted to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer, light is emitted on the opposite side (back side) of the phosphor layer to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component to be reflected is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the side of the phosphor layer where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the low refractive index layer 71 is provided between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, light is emitted from the phosphor layer opposite to the light extraction side (back side).
- the fluorescent components the fluorescent light incident on the interface is reflected at an angle greater than or equal to the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced. Therefore, when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle.
- the reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 71 between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently. .
- the low refractive index layer 81 is provided between the substrate 13 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, among the fluorescent components that emit light on the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93,
- the fluorescence incident on the interface at a critical angle greater than or equal to the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, it is possible to suppress the fluorescence component emitted at a shallow angle from the phosphor layer from entering the substrate. it can. That is, although it is incident on the substrate, it is reflected at the interface between the substrate and the outside and cannot be taken out to the outside, and a loss component that is guided in the substrate can be suppressed.
- the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 93 can be extracted outside without loss.
- the phosphor layer is partitioned by the light absorption layer when viewed from the light extraction direction, light can be prevented from entering the adjacent pixels by being guided through the phosphor layer. .
- the phosphor layers 91 to 93 are provided. It is possible to prevent the fluorescence emitted from the light from entering the adjacent phosphor layer by light absorption, and the display contrast can be improved.
- the second light absorption layer 141 formed on the excitation light incident surface of the barrier 51 since the second light absorption layer 141 formed on the excitation light incident surface of the barrier 51 is provided, the excitation light does not enter the phosphor layer and hits the bottom surface of the barrier 51 and is reflected. Thus, it is possible to prevent the penetration of the adjacent phosphor layers by light absorption, and it is possible to prevent the display contrast from being lowered. Further, in this configuration, since the light emitted from the light distribution adjustment layer 171 is extracted as it is without passing through other layers, the light emission profile is optimized only by adjusting the light distribution adjustment layer 171. Can do.
- FIG. 18 is a schematic sectional view showing a light emitting device according to the sixteenth embodiment.
- the light emitting device 180 includes an excitation light source 11 that emits excitation light, a first phosphor layer 91 that is arranged to face the excitation light source, emits fluorescence when excited by the excitation light, and a second phosphor layer 92.
- the selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the phosphor layers 91 to 93, and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 the low refractive index layer 71 having a refractive index smaller than that of the phosphor layers 91 to 93, and the light distribution control.
- the light reflection preventing layer 181 is generally configured. It is roughly composed.
- the external light antireflection layer 181 is provided on the light distribution adjustment layer 171 and has, for example, a refractive index gradient between the light distribution adjustment layer 171 and the outside.
- a refractive index gradient when the refractive index of the light distribution adjusting layer 171 is n1 and the external refractive index is n2, the light distribution adjusting layer 171 has a refractive index gradient from the light distribution adjusting layer 171 side toward the outside. It is preferable to have a gradient that gradually changes in the range from n1 to n2 in the thickness direction perpendicular to the light extraction surface. Specifically, it is preferable to have a gradient that changes stepwise or continuously.
- the external light antireflection layer 181 can minimize the external light reflection component that is reflected when the external light hits the light distribution adjustment layer.
- Such an external light antireflection layer 181 can be formed, for example, by (a1) laminating a plurality of layers (materials) having different refractive indexes stepwise or continuously. In addition, (a2) one or more microstructures having a minute inclination in the thickness direction are formed, and the proportion of the structure is continuously changed in the thickness direction, thereby preventing external light reflection having a refractive index gradient. Layer 151 can be formed.
- a structure in which a TiO 2 layer and a SiO 2 layer are laminated can be mentioned.
- a stacked structure including a combination of an MgO layer and an SiO 2 layer, a ZrO 2 layer and an SiO 2 layer, a PMMA layer and a silicon oil layer, and the like can also be given.
- this embodiment is not limited to the combination of these materials.
- examples of the material for forming the microstructure include transparent resins such as polyethylene, polypropylene, polycarbonate, and epoxy, and transparent inorganic materials such as SiO 2 and Si 3 N 4 . Furthermore, it is preferable to add a compound having a high refractive index to these materials, for example, a metal oxide such as TiO 2 , Cu 2 O, Fe 2 O 3 or the like. However, this embodiment is not limited to these materials.
- the light emission in the light-emitting device 180 is demonstrated.
- the light emitting device 180 when excitation light is incident on the first phosphor layer 91, the second phosphor layer 92, and the third phosphor layer 93 from the excitation light source 11, isotropic from each phosphor layer, that is, Light is emitted with equal energy in any direction.
- the light distribution profile of fluorescence extracted from the phosphor layer to the outside often differs depending on the type of phosphor.
- the refractive index of the phosphor material or resin material constituting the phosphor layer is different for each phosphor layer
- the refraction angle at which the fluorescence extracted outside is refracted at the interface between the phosphor layer and the outside is the phosphor layer It depends on. That is, the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted to the outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- the phosphor layer is made of an inorganic phosphor material
- the light emission characteristics vary depending on the particle size and shape of the phosphor particles. That is, the light distribution profile of the fluorescence extracted to the outside is different for each phosphor layer.
- a fluorescent component emitted from the first fluorescent layer 91, a fluorescent component emitted from the second fluorescent layer 92, and a fluorescent component emitted from the third fluorescent layer 93, each having a different emission profile, are arranged via the substrate 13.
- the incident fluorescence changes in the light distribution adjustment layer due to light scattering in the light distribution adjustment layer.
- the light path length in the light distribution adjustment layer is longer in the latter case between light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer and light incident in an oblique direction. Therefore, the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer.
- the fluorescence having a light emission profile in which the luminance is higher as the viewing angle is larger, and the luminance in at least 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer.
- the components are extracted to the outside as light emission 94 from the first phosphor layer 91, light emission 95 from the second phosphor layer 92, and light emission 96 from the third phosphor layer 93. As a result, it is possible to obtain a light emitting device that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction and does not change color when viewed from any direction.
- the light-reflective barrier 51 is provided between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, among the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor layer, the fluorescence component reflected at the interface of the substrate 13 and The fluorescent component that emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side of the phosphor layer is reflected by the side surface of the light-reflective barrier 51 and recycled again to a component that can be extracted to the substrate 13 side. That is, by providing the light-reflective barrier 51 between the phosphor layers adjacent to each other, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be efficiently extracted to the outside.
- the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer, light is emitted on the opposite side (back side) of the phosphor layer to the light extraction side.
- the fluorescent component to be reflected is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 on the side of the phosphor layer where the excitation light is incident, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the low refractive index layer 71 is provided between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, light is emitted from the phosphor layer opposite to the light extraction side (back side).
- the fluorescent components the fluorescent light incident on the interface is reflected at an angle greater than or equal to the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side.
- the wavelength-selective transmission / reflection layer 61 has a feature that the reflectance of light incident at a shallow angle with respect to the incident surface is reduced. Therefore, when combined with the low refractive index layer 71, the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61 is incident at a shallow angle.
- the reflected light can be reliably reflected and recycled. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 71 between the phosphor layers 91 to 93 and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer 61, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently. .
- the low refractive index layer 81 is provided between the substrate 13 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, among the fluorescent components that emit light on the light extraction side of the phosphor layers 91 to 93, By reflecting the fluorescence incident on the interface at a critical angle greater than or equal to the critical angle of the interface between the phosphor layer and the low refractive index layer, it is possible to suppress the fluorescence component emitted at a shallow angle from the phosphor layer from entering the substrate. it can. That is, although it is incident on the substrate, it is reflected at the interface between the substrate and the outside and cannot be taken out to the outside, and a loss component that is guided in the substrate can be suppressed. That is, by providing the low refractive index layer 81 between the substrate 13 and the phosphor layers 91 to 93, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layers 91 to 93 can be extracted outside without loss.
- the phosphor layer is partitioned by the light absorption layer when viewed from the light extraction direction, light can be prevented from entering the adjacent pixels by being guided through the phosphor layer.
- the light absorption layers 121 formed between the barrier 51 and the substrate 13 are provided between the light distribution adjustment layers adjacent to each other, the phosphor layers 91 to 93 are provided. It is possible to prevent the fluorescence emitted from the light from entering the adjacent phosphor layer by light absorption, and the display contrast can be improved.
- the excitation light since the second light absorption layer 141 formed on the excitation light incident surface of the barrier 51 is provided, the excitation light does not enter the phosphor layer and hits the bottom surface of the barrier 51 and is reflected. Thus, it is possible to prevent the penetration of the adjacent phosphor layers by light absorption, and it is possible to prevent the display contrast from being lowered.
- the light emission profile is optimized only by adjusting the light distribution adjustment layer 171. Can do. Further, in this configuration, since the external light reflection preventing layer 181 formed on the light distribution adjustment layer 171 is provided, the external light reflection component that the external light reflects upon the light distribution adjustment layer 181 is minimized. Can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to minimize the decrease in contrast in a bright place.
- the phosphor substrate refers to the phosphor layer, the light distribution adjusting layer, the barrier, and the light absorption layer in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above. It is a substrate on which etc. are formed.
- the light source is a substrate (light emitting element substrate) on which an excitation light source is formed in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above.
- the light source a known ultraviolet LED, blue LED, ultraviolet light emitting inorganic EL element, blue light emitting inorganic EL element, ultraviolet light emitting organic EL element, blue light emitting organic EL element, or the like is used.
- the embodiment is not limited to these light sources, and a light source produced by a known material or a known manufacturing method can be used.
- the ultraviolet light preferably emits light having a main light emission peak of 360 to 410 nm
- the blue light preferably has light emission of a main light emission peak of 410 to 470 nm.
- FIG. 19 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an organic EL element substrate constituting a display device according to a first embodiment.
- the display device of this embodiment includes a phosphor substrate comprising a substrate on which a phosphor layer, a light distribution adjusting layer, a barrier, a light absorption layer, and the like are formed in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above.
- the organic EL element substrate (light source) 210 is bonded to the phosphor substrate via a planarizing film or the like.
- the organic EL element substrate 210 includes a substrate 211 and an organic EL element 212 provided on one surface 211a of the substrate 211.
- the organic EL element 212 is schematically configured from a first electrode 213, an organic EL layer 214, and a second electrode 215 that are sequentially provided on one surface 211 a of the substrate 211. That is, the organic EL element 212 includes a pair of electrodes including the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215 and an organic EL layer 214 sandwiched between the pair of electrodes on one surface 211a of the substrate 211. I have.
- the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215 function as a pair as an anode or a cathode of the organic EL element 212.
- the optical distance between the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215 is adjusted to constitute a microresonator structure (microcavity structure).
- the organic EL layer 214 is laminated in order from the first electrode 213 side to the second electrode 215 side, the hole injection layer 216, the hole transport layer 217, the light emitting layer 218, the hole prevention layer 219, the electron transport layer. 220 and an electron injection layer 221.
- the hole injection layer 216, the hole transport layer 217, the light emitting layer 218, the hole prevention layer 219, the electron transport layer 220, and the electron injection layer 221 may each have a single layer structure or a multilayer structure.
- the hole injection layer 216, the hole transport layer 217, the light emitting layer 218, the hole prevention layer 219, the electron transport layer 220, and the electron injection layer 221 may each be an organic thin film or an inorganic thin film.
- the hole injection layer 216 efficiently injects holes from the first electrode 213.
- the hole transport layer 217 efficiently transports holes to the light emitting layer 218.
- the electron transport layer 220 efficiently transports electrons to the light emitting layer 218.
- the electron injection layer 221 efficiently injects electrons from the second electrode 215.
- the hole injection layer 216, the hole transport layer 217, the electron transport layer 220, and the electron injection layer 221 correspond to a carrier injection transport layer.
- the organic EL element 212 is not limited to the above configuration, and the organic EL layer 214 may have a single layer structure of a light emitting layer or a multilayer structure of a light emitting layer and a carrier injection / transport layer. .
- Specific examples of the configuration of the organic EL element 212 include the following. (1) Configuration in which only the light emitting layer is provided between the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215 (2) The hole transport layer and the light emitting layer are formed from the first electrode 213 side toward the second electrode 215 side.
- Second electrode 215 from the first electrode 213 side A structure in which a hole transport layer, a light emitting layer, and an electron transport layer are laminated in this order toward the side (5) From the first electrode 213 side to the second electrode 215 side, the hole injection layer, the hole transport layer (6) A structure in which a light emitting layer and an electron transport layer are laminated in this order (6) From the first electrode 213 side to the second electrode 215 side, a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a light emitting layer, an electron transport layer, Structure in which injection layers are laminated in this order (7) First electrode 213 side A structure in which a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a light emitting layer, a hole prevention layer, and an electron transport layer are laminated in this order toward the second electrode 215 side (8) From the first electrode 213 side to the second electrode 215 A structure in which a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a light emitting layer, a hole prevention layer, and an electron transport layer are laminated in this order toward the
- An edge cover 222 is formed so as to cover the end face of the first electrode 213. That is, the edge cover 222 is formed on the one surface 211a of the substrate 211 between the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215 in order to prevent leakage between the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215. It is provided so as to cover the edge part of the formed first electrode 213.
- each structural member which comprises the organic EL element substrate 210, and its formation method are demonstrated concretely, this embodiment is not limited to these structural members and a formation method.
- substrate etc. which performed the insulation process by this method are mentioned, this embodiment is not limited to these board
- a substrate in which a plastic substrate is coated with an inorganic material and a substrate in which a metal substrate is coated with an inorganic insulating material are preferable.
- a substrate coated with such an inorganic material deterioration of organic EL due to moisture permeation, which is the biggest problem when a plastic substrate is used as a substrate of an organic EL element substrate (organic EL is particularly low in quantity) It is known that deterioration also occurs with respect to moisture.).
- leakage (short) due to protrusions on the metal substrate which is the biggest problem when a metal substrate is used as the substrate of the organic EL element substrate (the film thickness of the organic EL layer is very thin, about 100 to 200 nm. It is known that leakage (short-circuiting) occurs in the current in the pixel portion due to the above.
- a substrate that does not melt at a temperature of 500 ° C. or lower and does not generate distortion As the substrate 211.
- a general metal substrate has a coefficient of thermal expansion different from that of glass, it is difficult to form a TFT on a metal substrate with a conventional production apparatus, but the linear expansion coefficient is 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 / ° C. or less.
- a metal substrate that is an iron-nickel alloy of this type and adjusting the linear expansion coefficient to glass it becomes possible to form TFTs on the metal substrate at low cost using a conventional production apparatus.
- the TFT on the glass substrate is transferred to the plastic substrate, thereby transferring the TFT onto the plastic substrate. be able to.
- the TFT formed on the substrate 211 is formed in advance on one surface 211a of the substrate 211 before the organic EL element 212 is formed, and functions as a pixel switching element and an organic EL element driving element.
- a known TFT can be cited.
- a metal-insulator-metal (MIM) diode can also be used.
- TFTs that can be used in active drive organic EL display devices and organic EL display devices can be formed using known materials, structures, and formation methods.
- the material of the active layer constituting the TFT include inorganic semiconductor materials such as amorphous silicon (amorphous silicon), polycrystalline silicon (polysilicon), microcrystalline silicon, cadmium selenide, zinc oxide, indium oxide-oxide Examples thereof include oxide semiconductor materials such as gallium-zinc oxide, and organic semiconductor materials such as polythiophene derivatives, thiophene oligomers, poly (p-ferylene vinylene) derivatives, naphthacene, and pentacene.
- the TFT structure include a staggered type, an inverted staggered type, a top gate type, and a coplanar type.
- an active layer forming method for forming a TFT (1) a method of ion doping impurities into amorphous silicon formed by plasma induced chemical vapor deposition (PECVD), and (2) a silane (SiH 4 ) gas is used.
- PECVD plasma induced chemical vapor deposition
- SiH 4 silane
- amorphous silicon by low pressure chemical vapor deposition (LPCVD), crystallizing amorphous silicon by solid phase growth to obtain polysilicon, and then ion doping by ion implantation, (3) Si 2 H Amorphous silicon is formed by LPCVD using 6 gases or PECVD using SiH 4 gas, annealed by a laser such as an excimer laser, etc., and amorphous silicon is crystallized to obtain polysilicon, followed by ion doping (Low temperature process), (4) LPCVD method or The polysilicon layer is formed by ECVD method, a gate insulating film formed by thermal oxidation at 1000 ° C.
- LPCVD low pressure chemical vapor deposition
- a method of performing ion doping high temperature Process
- a method of forming an organic semiconductor material by an inkjet method a method of obtaining a single crystal film of the organic semiconductor material.
- the gate insulating film constituting the TFT in this embodiment can be formed using a known material.
- As the gate insulating film for example, PECVD method, and a SiO 2 or polysilicon film formed by the LPCVD method or the like insulating film made of SiO 2 or the like obtained by thermal oxidation.
- the signal electrode line, the scanning electrode line, the common electrode line, the first drive electrode, and the second drive electrode of the TFT in this embodiment can be formed using a known material.
- the material of the signal electrode line, the scan electrode line, the common electrode line, the first drive electrode, and the second drive electrode include tantalum (Ta), aluminum (Al), copper (Cu), and the like.
- the TFT of the organic EL element substrate 210 can be configured as described above, but the present embodiment is not limited to these materials, structures, and formation methods.
- the interlayer insulating film that can be used in the active drive organic EL display device and the organic EL display device can be formed using a known material.
- a material of the interlayer insulating film for example, inorganic materials such as silicon oxide (SiO 2 ), silicon nitride (SiN or Si 2 N 4 ), tantalum oxide (TaO or Ta 2 O 5 ), acrylic resin, resist material Organic materials, etc. are mentioned.
- Examples of the method for forming the interlayer insulating film include a dry process such as a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) method and a vacuum deposition method, and a wet process such as a spin coating method. If necessary, the interlayer insulating film can be patterned by a photolithography method or the like.
- the organic EL element 212 When light emitted from the organic EL element 212 is extracted from the side opposite to the substrate 211 (second electrode 215 side), external light is incident on the TFT formed on the one surface 211a of the substrate 211, and the characteristics of the TFT. In order to prevent the change from occurring, it is preferable to form a light-shielding insulating film having light-shielding properties. Further, the interlayer insulating film and the light-shielding insulating film can be used in combination.
- Examples of the material of the light-shielding insulating film include, for example, pigments or dyes such as phthalocyanine and quinaclonone dispersed in a polymer resin such as polyimide, color resists, black matrix materials, and inorganic insulating materials such as Ni x Zn y Fe 2 O 4 Although materials etc. are mentioned, this embodiment is not limited to these materials and a formation method.
- the active drive type organic EL display device when a TFT or the like is formed on one surface 211a of the substrate 211, an unevenness is formed on the surface, and this unevenness causes a defect in the organic EL element 212 (for example, a pixel electrode defect). There is a risk that a defect of the organic EL layer, a disconnection of the second electrode, a short circuit between the first electrode and the second electrode, a decrease in breakdown voltage, or the like) may occur.
- a planarizing film may be provided on the interlayer insulating film.
- planarization film can be formed using a known material.
- the material for the planarizing film include inorganic materials such as silicon oxide, silicon nitride, and tantalum oxide, and organic materials such as polyimide, acrylic resin, and resist material.
- the method for forming the planarization film include a dry process such as a CVD method and a vacuum deposition method, and a wet process such as a spin coating method.
- the present embodiment is limited to these materials and the formation method. is not.
- the planarization film may have either a single layer structure or a multilayer structure.
- the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215 function as a pair as an anode or a cathode of the organic EL element 212. That is, when the first electrode 213 is an anode, the second electrode 215 is a cathode, and when the first electrode 213 is a cathode, the second electrode 215 is an anode.
- an electrode material for forming the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215 a known electrode material can be used.
- an electrode material for forming the anode gold (Au), platinum (Pt), nickel (Ni) or the like having a work function of 4.5 eV or more from the viewpoint of more efficiently injecting holes into the organic EL layer 214.
- Metal oxide (ITO) composed of indium (In) and tin (Sn), oxide (SnO 2 ) of tin (Sn), oxide (IZO) composed of indium (In) and zinc (Zn) Transparent electrode materials and the like.
- lithium (Li), calcium (Ca), cerium (Ce) having a work function of 4.5 eV or less from the viewpoint of more efficiently injecting electrons into the organic EL layer 214.
- metals such as barium (Ba) and aluminum (Al), or alloys such as Mg: Ag alloys and Li: Al alloys containing these metals.
- the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215 can be formed by a known method such as an EB vapor deposition method, a sputtering method, an ion plating method, or a resistance heating vapor deposition method using the above-described materials. Is not limited to these forming methods. Moreover, the electrode formed by the photolithographic method and the laser peeling method can also be patterned as needed, and the electrode patterned directly by combining with a shadow mask can also be formed.
- the film thicknesses of the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215 are preferably 50 nm or more. When the film thickness is less than 50 nm, the wiring resistance increases and the drive voltage may increase.
- a translucent electrode As the first electrode 213 or the second electrode 215.
- a material for the semitransparent electrode a metal semitransparent electrode alone or a combination of a metal translucent electrode and a transparent electrode material can be used.
- silver is preferable from the viewpoint of reflectance and transmittance.
- the film thickness of the translucent electrode is preferably 5 to 30 nm.
- the film thickness of the translucent electrode is less than 5 nm, the light cannot be sufficiently reflected, and the interference effect cannot be obtained sufficiently.
- the film thickness of the translucent electrode exceeds 30 nm, the light transmittance is rapidly decreased, so that the luminance and light emission efficiency of the display device may be decreased.
- the electrode having high reflectivity include a reflective metal electrode (reflective electrode) made of, for example, aluminum, silver, gold, aluminum-lithium alloy, aluminum-neodymium alloy, aluminum-silicon alloy, and the like. The electrode etc. which combined are mentioned.
- the charge injection / transport layer is a charge injection layer (hole injection layer 216, electron injection layer 221) for the purpose of more efficiently injecting charges (holes, electrons) from the electrode and transporting (injection) to the light emitting layer.
- a charge transport layer (hole transport layer 217, electron transport layer 220), and may be composed only of the charge injection transport material exemplified below, and optionally includes additives (donor, acceptor, etc.).
- a structure in which these materials are dispersed in a polymer material (binding resin) or an inorganic material may be used.
- charge injecting and transporting material known charge injecting and transporting materials for organic EL elements and organic photoconductors can be used. Such charge injecting and transporting materials are classified into hole injecting and transporting materials and electron injecting and transporting materials. Specific examples of these compounds are given below, but this embodiment is not limited to these materials. .
- oxides such as vanadium oxide (V 2 O 5 ) and molybdenum oxide (MoO 2 ), and inorganic p-type semiconductor materials are used.
- a porphyrin compound N, N′-bis (3-methylphenyl) -N, N′-bis (phenyl) -benzidine (TPD), N, N′-di (naphthalen-1-yl) -N, N ′ -Diphenyl-benzidine ( ⁇ -NPD), 4,4 ', 4 "-tris (carbazol-9-yl) triphenylamine (TCTA), N, N-dicarbazolyl-3,5-benzene (m-CP), 4,4 ′-(cyclohexane-1,1-diyl) bis (N, N-di-p-tolylaniline) (TAPC), 2,2′-bis (N, N-diphenylamine) -9,9′- Spirofluorene (DPA S), N1, N1 ′-(biphenyl-4,4′-diyl) bis (N1-phenyl-N4, N4-di-m-tolylbenzene-1
- the energy level of the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO) is higher than that of the material of the hole transport layer 217 from the viewpoint of more efficiently injecting and transporting holes from the anode. It is preferable to use a low material.
- a material for the hole transport layer 217 a material having higher hole mobility than the material for the hole injection layer 216 is preferably used.
- the hole injection layer 216 and the hole transport layer 217 may optionally contain an additive (donor, acceptor, etc.).
- the hole injection layer 216 and the hole transport layer 217 preferably include an acceptor.
- the acceptor a known acceptor material for organic EL elements can be used. Although these specific compounds are illustrated below, this embodiment is not limited to these materials.
- the acceptor may be either an inorganic material or an organic material.
- the inorganic material include gold (Au), platinum (Pt), tungsten (W), iridium (Ir), phosphorus oxychloride (POCl 3 ), hexafluoroarsenate ion (AsF 6 ⁇ ), chlorine (Cl), Examples include bromine (Br), iodine (I), vanadium oxide (V 2 O 5 ), molybdenum oxide (MoO 2 ), and the like.
- organic materials include 7,7,8,8, -tetracyanoquinodimethane (TCNQ), tetrafluorotetracyanoquinodimethane (TCNQF 4 ), tetracyanoethylene (TCNE), hexacyanobutadiene (HCNB), and dicyclohexane.
- Compounds having a cyano group such as dicyanobenzoquinone (DDQ); compounds having a nitro group such as trinitrofluorenone (TNF) and dinitrofluorenone (DNF); fluoranil; chloranil; bromanyl and the like.
- compounds having a cyano group such as TCNQ, TCNQF 4 , TCNE, HCNB, and DDQ are preferable because the effect of increasing the hole concentration is higher.
- a low molecular material an inorganic material that is an n-type semiconductor; 1,3-bis [2- (2,2′-bipyridin-6-yl) -1,3,4-oxadiazo-5-yl] benzene (Bpy-OXD), 1,3-bis (5- (4- (tert-butyl) phenyl) Oxadiazole derivatives such as -1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl) benzene (OXD7); 3- (4-biphenyl) -4-phenyl-5-tert-butylphenyl-1,2,4 -Triazole derivatives such as triazole (TAZ); thiopyrazine dioxide derivative; benzoquinone derivative; naphthoquinone derivative; anthraquinone derivative; diphenoquinone derivative; fluorenone derivative
- a material having a higher energy level of the lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) than that of the material of the electron transport layer 220 is used from the viewpoint of more efficiently injecting and transporting electrons from the cathode. Is preferred.
- a material for the electron transport layer 220 a material having higher electron mobility than the material for the electron injection layer 221 is preferably used.
- the electron transport layer 220 and the electron injection layer 221 may optionally contain an additive (donor, acceptor, etc.).
- the electron transport layer 220 and the electron injection layer 221 preferably include a donor.
- a donor the well-known donor material for organic EL elements can be used. Although these specific compounds are illustrated below, this embodiment is not limited to these materials.
- the donor may be either an inorganic material or an organic material.
- the inorganic material include alkali metals such as lithium, sodium and potassium; alkaline earth metals such as magnesium and calcium; rare earth elements; aluminum (Al); silver (Ag); copper (Cu); It is done.
- organic material examples include a compound having an aromatic tertiary amine skeleton, a condensed polycyclic compound which may have a substituent such as phenanthrene, pyrene, perylene, anthracene, tetracene and pentacene, tetrathiafulvalene (TTF), Examples include dibenzofuran, phenothiazine, and carbazole.
- Compounds having an aromatic tertiary amine skeleton include anilines; phenylenediamines; N, N, N ′, N′-tetraphenylbenzidine, N, N′-bis- (3-methylphenyl) -N, N Benzidines such as' -bis- (phenyl) -benzidine, N, N'-di (naphthalen-1-yl) -N, N'-diphenyl-benzidine; triphenylamine, 4,4'4 "-tris ( N, N-diphenyl-amino) -triphenylamine, 4,4'4 "-tris (N-3-methylphenyl-N-phenyl-amino) -triphenylamine, 4,4'4" -tris (N Triphenylamines such as-(1-naphthyl) -N-phenyl-amino) -triphenylamine; N, N'-di- (4-methyl-
- the above-mentioned condensed polycyclic compound “has a substituent” means that one or more hydrogen atoms in the condensed polycyclic compound are substituted with a group other than a hydrogen atom (substituent).
- the number of is not particularly limited, and all hydrogen atoms may be substituted with a substituent.
- the position of the substituent is not particularly limited. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and an aryl group having 6 to 15 carbon atoms. An aryloxy group having 6 to 15 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, and the like.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
- Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group include methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, isobutyl group, sec-butyl group, tert-butyl group, and n-pentyl group.
- the cyclic alkyl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cycloheptyl group, cyclooctyl group, cyclononyl group, cyclodecyl group, norbornyl group, isobornyl Group, 1-adamantyl group, 2-adamantyl group, tricyclodecyl group and the like.
- Examples of the alkoxy group include a monovalent group in which an alkyl group is bonded to an oxygen atom.
- Examples of the alkenyl group include an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms in which one single bond (C—C) between carbon atoms is substituted with a double bond (C ⁇ C).
- Examples of the alkenyloxy group include a monovalent group in which the alkenyl group is bonded to an oxygen atom.
- the aryl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and the number of ring members is not particularly limited, and preferred examples include a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, a 2-naphthyl group, and the like.
- Examples of the aryloxy group include a monovalent group in which an aryl group is bonded to an oxygen atom.
- Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
- a compound having an aromatic tertiary amine skeleton, a condensed polycyclic compound which may have a substituent, and an alkali metal are preferable because the effect of increasing the electron concentration is higher.
- the light-emitting layer 218 may be composed only of the organic light-emitting material exemplified below, or may be composed of a combination of a light-emitting dopant and a host material, and optionally includes a hole transport material, an electron transport material, and an addition An agent (donor, acceptor, etc.) may be included. Moreover, the structure by which these each material was disperse
- organic light emitting material a known light emitting material for an organic EL element can be used.
- Such light-emitting materials are classified into low-molecular light-emitting materials, polymer light-emitting materials, and the like. Specific examples of these compounds are given below, but the present embodiment is not limited to these materials.
- an aromatic dimethylidene compound such as 4,4′-bis (2,2′-diphenylvinyl) -biphenyl (DPVBi); Oxadiazole compounds such as 2- [2- [4- (5-methyl-2-benzoxazolyl) phenyl] vinyl] benzoxazole; 3- (4-biphenyl) -4-phenyl-5-t-butyl Triazole derivatives such as phenyl-1,2,4-triazole (TAZ); styrylbenzene compounds such as 1,4-bis (2-methylstyryl) benzene; thiopyrazine dioxide derivatives, benzoquinone derivatives, naphthoquinone derivatives, anthraquinone derivatives, Fluorescent organic materials such as diphenoquinone derivatives and fluorenone derivatives; azomethine zinc complexes, (8- Rokishi
- Polymer light-emitting materials used for the light-emitting layer 218 include poly (2-decyloxy-1,4-phenylene) (DO-PPP), poly [2,5-bis- [2- (N, N, N-triethyl).
- the organic light emitting material is preferably a low molecular light emitting material, and a phosphorescent material having high light emission efficiency is preferably used from the viewpoint of reducing power consumption.
- a well-known dopant for organic EL elements can be used.
- the dopant in the case of an ultraviolet light emitting material, p-quaterphenyl, 3,5,3,5-tetra-tert-butylsecphenyl, 3,5,3,5-tetra-tert-butyl-p- Examples thereof include fluorescent light emitting materials such as quinckphenyl.
- a fluorescent light emitting material such as a styryl derivative; bis [(4,6-difluorophenyl) -pyridinato-N, C2 ′] picolinate iridium (III) (FIrpic), bis (4 ′, 6 And phosphorescent organic metal complexes such as' -difluorophenylpolydinato) tetrakis (1-pyrazoyl) borate iridium (III) (FIr6).
- the green light emitting material include phosphorescent organic metal complexes such as tris (2-phenylpyridinate) iridium (Ir (ppy) 3 ).
- each layer which comprises the organic EL layer 214 was demonstrated, for example, a host material can also be used as a hole transport material or an electron transport material, and a hole transport material and an electron transport material can also be used as a host material.
- a known wet process, dry process, and laser transfer method are used. Etc. are used.
- a coating method such as a spin coating method, a dipping method, a doctor blade method, a discharge coating method, a spray coating method, or the like using a liquid in which a material constituting each layer is dissolved or dispersed in a solvent; an inkjet method; Examples thereof include a printing method such as a relief printing method, an intaglio printing method, a screen printing method, and a micro gravure coating method.
- the liquid used in the above coating method and printing method may contain additives for adjusting the physical properties of the liquid, such as a leveling agent and a viscosity modifier.
- a resistance heating vapor deposition method As the dry process, a resistance heating vapor deposition method, an electron beam (EB) vapor deposition method, a molecular beam epitaxy (MBE) method, a sputtering method, an organic vapor phase vapor deposition (OVPD) method, or the like, using the material constituting each of the above layers is used. It is done.
- the thickness of each of the hole injection layer 216, the hole transport layer 217, the light emitting layer 218, the hole prevention layer 219, the electron transport layer 220, and the electron injection layer 221 is usually about 1 to 1000 nm, but 10 to 200 nm. Is preferred. If the film thickness is less than 10 nm, the properties (charge injection characteristics, transport characteristics, confinement characteristics) that are originally required cannot be obtained. In addition, pixel defects due to foreign matters such as dust may occur. On the other hand, when the film thickness exceeds 200 nm, the driving voltage increases due to the resistance component of the organic EL layer 214, resulting in
- the edge cover 222 can be formed by using an insulating material by a known method such as an EB vapor deposition method, a sputtering method, an ion plating method, a resistance heating vapor deposition method, or the like by a known dry method or a wet photolithography method. Patterning can be performed, but the present embodiment is not limited to these forming methods.
- a known material is used as the insulating material constituting the edge cover 222, but the insulating material is not particularly limited in the present embodiment. Since the edge cover 222 needs to transmit light, examples of the insulating material constituting the edge cover 222 include SiO, SiON, SiN, SiOC, SiC, HfSiON, ZrO, HfO, and LaO.
- the film thickness of the edge cover 222 is preferably 100 to 2000 nm. If the film thickness is less than 100 nm, the insulating property is not sufficient, and leakage occurs between the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215, resulting in an increase in power consumption and non-light emission. On the other hand, if the film thickness exceeds 2000 nm, the film forming process takes time, which causes a decrease in production efficiency and causes the second electrode 215 to be disconnected by the edge cover 222.
- the organic EL element 212 has a microcavity structure (optical microresonator structure) based on an interference effect between the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215, or a microcavity structure (optical microresonator structure) based on a dielectric multilayer film. ).
- the organic EL layer 214 emits light in the front direction (light extraction direction) due to the interference effect between the first electrode 213 and the second electrode 215. It can be condensed.
- the light emission of the organic EL layer 214 can have directivity, the light emission loss escaping to the surroundings can be reduced, and the light emission efficiency can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to more efficiently propagate the light emission energy generated in the organic EL layer 214 to the phosphor layer, and the front luminance of the display device can be increased.
- the emission spectrum of the organic EL layer 214 can be adjusted, and the desired emission peak wavelength and half width can be adjusted. Thereby, it is possible to control the red phosphor and the green phosphor to a spectrum that can be excited more effectively, and the color purity of the blue pixel can be improved.
- the display device of this embodiment is electrically connected to an external drive circuit (scanning line electrode circuit, data signal electrode circuit, power supply circuit).
- an external drive circuit scanning line electrode circuit, data signal electrode circuit, power supply circuit.
- the substrate 211 constituting the organic EL element substrate 210 a substrate coated with an insulating material on a glass substrate, more preferably a metal substrate or a substrate coated with an insulating material on a plastic substrate, more preferably a metal substrate.
- a substrate obtained by coating an insulating material on an upper or plastic substrate is used.
- the display device of this embodiment may be driven by directly connecting the organic EL element substrate 210 to an external circuit, or a switching circuit such as a TFT is disposed in a pixel, and wiring connected to the TFT or the like
- An external drive circuit (scanning line electrode circuit (source driver), data signal electrode circuit (gate driver), power supply circuit) for driving the organic EL element substrate 210 may be electrically connected.
- a color filter between the phosphor substrate and the organic EL element substrate 210.
- a conventional color filter can be used as the color filter.
- the color filter by providing the color filter, the color purity of the red pixel, the green pixel, and the blue pixel can be increased, and the color reproduction range of the display device can be expanded.
- the blue color filter formed on the blue phosphor layer, the green color filter formed on the green phosphor layer, and the red color filter formed on the red phosphor layer include excitation light contained in external light. Since the component is absorbed, light emission of the phosphor layer due to external light can be reduced or prevented, and a reduction in contrast can be reduced or prevented.
- the blue color filter formed on the blue phosphor layer, the green color filter formed on the green phosphor layer, and the red color filter formed on the red phosphor layer are not absorbed by the phosphor layer, Since the excitation light to be transmitted can be prevented from leaking to the outside, it is possible to prevent the color purity of the display from being deteriorated due to a mixture of light emitted from the phosphor layer and excitation light.
- the brightness does not change when viewed from any direction, the color does not change when viewed from any direction, and the power consumption can be reduced.
- a display device can be realized.
- FIG. 20 is a schematic sectional view showing an LED element substrate constituting a display device according to a second embodiment.
- the display device of this embodiment includes a phosphor substrate comprising a substrate on which a phosphor layer, a light distribution adjusting layer, a barrier, a light absorption layer, and the like are formed in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above.
- the LED substrate (light source) 230 is bonded to the phosphor substrate via a flattening film or the like.
- the LED substrate 230 includes a substrate 231, a first buffer layer 232, an n-type contact layer 233, a second n-type cladding layer 234, and a first n-type cladding that are sequentially stacked on one surface 211 a of the substrate 211.
- a layer 235, an active layer 236, a first p-type cladding layer 237, a second p-type cladding layer 238, a second buffer layer 239, a cathode 240 formed on the n-type contact layer 233, and a second An anode 241 formed on the buffer layer 239 is schematically configured.
- LED other well-known LED, for example, ultraviolet light emission inorganic LED, blue light emission inorganic LED, etc. can be used, However, A specific structure is not limited to said thing.
- the active layer 236 is a layer that emits light by recombination of electrons and holes, and a known active layer material for LED can be used as the active layer material.
- a known active layer material for LED can be used as the active layer material.
- an active layer material for example, as an ultraviolet active layer material, AlGaN, InAlN, In a Al b Ga 1-ab N (0 ⁇ a, 0 ⁇ b, a + b ⁇ 1), blue active layer material Examples thereof include In z Ga 1-z N (0 ⁇ z ⁇ 1), but the present embodiment is not limited to these.
- the active layer 236 has a single quantum well structure or a multiple quantum well structure.
- the active layer of the quantum well structure may be either n-type or p-type. However, when it is a non-doped (no impurity added) active layer, the half-value width of the emission wavelength is narrowed due to interband emission, and light emission with good color purity is achieved. Since it is obtained, it is preferable.
- the active layer 236 may be doped with at least one of a donor impurity and an acceptor impurity. If the crystallinity of the active layer doped with the impurity is the same as that of the non-doped layer, the emission intensity between bands can be further increased by doping the donor impurity as compared with the non-doped layer.
- the acceptor impurity is doped, the peak wavelength can be shifted to the lower energy side by about 0.5 eV from the peak wavelength of interband light emission, but the full width at half maximum is widened.
- the light emission intensity can be further increased as compared with the light emission intensity of the active layer doped only with the acceptor impurity.
- the conductivity type of the active layer is preferably doped with a donor impurity such as Si to be n-type.
- the second n-type cladding layer 234 and the first n-type cladding layer 235 a known n-type cladding layer material for LED can be used, and a single layer or a multilayer structure may be used.
- the second n-type cladding layer 234 and the first n-type cladding layer 235 are formed of an n-type semiconductor having a band gap energy larger than that of the active layer 236, the second n-type cladding layer 234 and the first n-type cladding layer 234 are formed.
- a potential barrier against holes is formed between the mold cladding layer 235 and the active layer 236, and holes can be confined in the active layer 236.
- the second n-type cladding layer 234 and the first n-type cladding layer 235 can be formed from n-type In x Ga 1-x N (0 ⁇ x ⁇ 1). Is not limited to these.
- the first p-type cladding layer 237 and the second p-type cladding layer 2308 a known p-type cladding layer material for LED can be used, and a single layer or a multilayer structure may be used.
- the first p-type cladding layer 237 and the second p-type cladding layer 238 are formed of a p-type semiconductor having a band gap energy larger than that of the active layer 236, the first p-type cladding layer 237 and the second p-type cladding layer 238 are used.
- a potential barrier against electrons is formed between the mold cladding layer 238 and the active layer 236, and the electrons can be confined in the active layer 236.
- the first p-type cladding layer 237 and the second p-type cladding layer 238 can be formed from Al y Ga 1-y N (0 ⁇ y ⁇ 1). It is not limited to.
- n-type contact layer 233 a known contact layer material for LED can be used.
- a layer for forming an electrode in contact with the second n-type clad layer 234 and the first n-type clad layer 235 An n-type contact layer 233 made of n-type GaN can be formed. It is also possible to form a p-type contact layer made of p-type GaN as a layer for forming an electrode in contact with the first p-type cladding layer 237 and the second p-type cladding layer 238.
- this p-type contact layer is not particularly required to be formed if the second n-type cladding layer 234 and the second p-type cladding layer 238 are formed of GaN.
- the n-type cladding layer 234 and the second p-type cladding layer 238) may be used as contact layers.
- a known film forming process for LEDs can be used, but the present embodiment is not particularly limited thereto.
- a vapor phase growth method such as MOVPE (metal organic vapor phase epitaxy), MBE (molecular beam vapor phase epitaxy), HDVPE (hydride vapor phase epitaxy), for example, sapphire (C plane, A plane, R plane), SiC (including 6H—SiC, 4H—SiC), spinel (MgAl 2 O 4 , especially its (111) plane), ZnO, Si, GaAs, or other oxide single crystal substrates ( It is possible to form on a substrate such as NGO.
- MOVPE metal organic vapor phase epitaxy
- MBE molecular beam vapor phase epitaxy
- HDVPE hydrogen vapor phase epitaxy
- sapphire C plane, A plane, R plane
- SiC including 6H—SiC, 4H—SiC
- spinel MgAl 2 O 4 , especially its (111) plane
- the brightness does not change when viewed from any direction, the color does not change when viewed from any direction, and the power consumption can be reduced.
- a display device can be realized.
- FIG. 21 is a schematic sectional view showing an inorganic EL element substrate constituting a display device according to a third embodiment.
- the display device of this embodiment includes a phosphor substrate comprising a substrate on which a phosphor layer, a light distribution adjustment layer, a barrier, a light absorption layer, and the like are formed in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above. And an inorganic EL element substrate (light source) 250 bonded on a phosphor substrate via a planarizing film or the like.
- the inorganic EL element substrate 250 is generally composed of a substrate 251 and an inorganic EL element 252 provided on one surface 251a of the substrate 251.
- the inorganic EL element 252 includes a first electrode 253, a first dielectric layer 254, a light emitting layer 255, a second dielectric layer 256, and a second electrode 257, which are sequentially stacked on one surface 251a of the substrate 251. Yes.
- the first electrode 253 and the second electrode 257 function as a pair as an anode or a cathode of the inorganic EL element 252.
- a known inorganic EL element such as an ultraviolet light emitting inorganic EL element or a blue light emitting inorganic EL element can be used, but the specific configuration is not limited to the above. Absent.
- each structural member which comprises the inorganic EL element substrate 250, and its formation method are demonstrated concretely, this embodiment is not limited to these structural members and a formation method.
- the same substrate as the substrate 211 constituting the organic EL element substrate 210 described above is used.
- the first electrode 253 and the second electrode 257 function as a pair as an anode or a cathode of the inorganic EL element 252. That is, when the first electrode 253 is an anode, the second electrode 257 is a cathode, and when the first electrode 253 is a cathode, the second electrode 257 is an anode.
- a metal such as aluminum (Al), gold (Au), platinum (Pt), nickel (Ni), and an oxide made of indium (In) and tin (Sn) (ITO), tin (Sn) oxide (SnO 2 ), oxide (IZO) made of indium (In) and zinc (Zn), and the like can be cited as transparent electrode materials. It is not limited.
- a transparent electrode such as ITO is good for the electrode on the light extraction side, and a reflective electrode made of aluminum or the like is preferably used for the electrode on the opposite side to the light extraction direction.
- the first electrode 253 and the second electrode 257 can be formed by using a known method such as an EB vapor deposition method, a sputtering method, an ion plating method, or a resistance heating vapor deposition method using the above materials. Is not limited to these forming methods. Moreover, the electrode formed by the photolithographic method and the laser peeling method can also be patterned as needed, and the patterned electrode can also be formed by combining with a shadow mask.
- the film thicknesses of the first electrode 253 and the second electrode 257 are preferably 50 nm or more. When the film thickness is less than 50 nm, the wiring resistance increases and the drive voltage may increase.
- a known dielectric material for inorganic EL elements can be used as the first dielectric layer 254 and the second dielectric layer 256.
- a known dielectric material for inorganic EL elements include tantalum pentoxide (Ta 2 O 5 ), silicon oxide (SiO 2 ), silicon nitride (Si 3 N 4 ), aluminum oxide (Al 2 O 3 ), aluminum titanate ( Examples include AlTiO 3 ), barium titanate (BaTiO 3 ), and strontium titanate (SrTiO 3 ).
- the present embodiment is not limited to these dielectric materials.
- first dielectric layer 254 and the second dielectric layer 256 may have a single layer structure made of one type selected from the above dielectric materials, or may have a multilayer structure in which two or more types are stacked. Also good.
- the film thicknesses of the first dielectric layer 254 and the second dielectric layer 256 are preferably about 200 to 500 nm.
- the light-emitting layer 255 a known light-emitting material for inorganic EL elements can be used.
- a light emitting material for example, ZnF 2 : Gd as an ultraviolet light emitting material, BaAl 2 S 4 : Eu, CaAl 2 S 4 : Eu, ZnAl 2 S 4 : Eu, Ba 2 SiS 4 as a blue light emitting material.
- the thickness of the light emitting layer 255 is preferably about 300 to 1000 nm.
- the brightness does not change when viewed from any direction, the color does not change when viewed from any direction, and the power consumption can be reduced.
- a display device can be realized.
- the organic EL element substrate is exemplified in the first embodiment
- the LED substrate is exemplified in the second embodiment
- the inorganic EL element substrate is exemplified in the third embodiment.
- the sealing film and the sealing substrate can be formed by a known sealing material and sealing method.
- the sealing film can be formed by applying a resin on the surface opposite to the substrate constituting the light source by using a spin coat method, an ODF, a laminate method, or the like.
- resin is further added using spin coating, ODF, lamination, etc.
- a sealing film can be formed by coating, or a sealing substrate can be attached.
- Such a sealing film or a sealing substrate can prevent entry of oxygen and moisture from the outside into the light-emitting element, thereby improving the life of the light source.
- it can also be made to adhere
- a method of sealing an inert gas such as nitrogen gas or argon gas with a glass plate, a metal plate, or the like can be given.
- a hygroscopic agent such as barium oxide in the enclosed inert gas because deterioration of the organic EL element due to moisture can be more effectively reduced.
- this embodiment is not limited to these members and forming methods.
- when light is extracted from the side opposite to the substrate, it is necessary to use a light-transmitting material for both the sealing film and the sealing substrate.
- FIG. 22 is a schematic sectional view showing a display device according to a fourth embodiment. 22, the same components as those of the light emitting device 30 illustrated in FIG. 3 and the organic EL element substrate 210 illustrated in FIG. 19 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.
- the display device 260 of the present embodiment has the same configuration as the substrate on which the phosphor layer, the light distribution adjusting layer, the barrier, the light absorption layer, and the like are formed in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above. It is schematically composed of a phosphor substrate 261 and an active matrix driving type organic EL element substrate (light source) 262 bonded on the phosphor substrate 261 via a planarizing film.
- an active matrix driving method using TFTs is used as means for switching whether to irradiate each of the red pixel PR, the green pixel PG, and the blue pixel PB.
- the blue pixel PB has a light scattering layer 263 that scatters blue light.
- FIG. 23 is a schematic configuration diagram illustrating a display device including an organic EL element substrate.
- the organic EL element substrate 262 has a TFT 264 formed on one surface 211 a of the substrate 211. That is, the gate electrode 265 and the gate line 266 are formed on one surface 211a of the substrate 211, and the gate insulating film 267 is formed on the one surface 211a of the substrate 211 so as to cover the gate electrode 265 and the gate line 266.
- An active layer (not shown) is formed on the gate insulating film 267.
- a source electrode 268, a drain electrode 269, and a data line 270 are formed on the active layer, and covers the source electrode 268, the drain electrode 269, and the data line 270.
- the planarizing film 271 is formed.
- planarization film 271 does not have to have a single layer structure, and may have a structure in which another interlayer insulating film and a planarization film are combined. Further, a contact hole 272 that penetrates the planarization film 271 or the interlayer insulating film and reaches the drain electrode 269 is formed, and the organic EL that is electrically connected to the drain electrode 269 via the contact hole 272 on the planarization film 271. A first electrode 213 of the element 212 is formed. The configuration of the organic EL element 212 is the same as that in the first embodiment.
- the TFT 264 is formed in advance on one surface 211a of the substrate 211 before forming the organic EL element 212, and functions as a pixel switching element and an organic EL element driving element.
- the TFT 264 includes a known TFT, and can be formed using a known material, structure, and formation method. In this embodiment, a metal-insulator-metal (MIM) diode can be used instead of the TFT 264.
- MIM metal-insulator-metal
- the material of the active layer constituting the TFT 264 the same material as in the first embodiment described above is used.
- a method for forming the active layer constituting the TFT 264 the same method as in the first embodiment described above is used.
- the gate insulating film 267 included in the TFT 264 can be formed using a known material.
- As the gate insulating film 267 for example, PECVD method, SiO 2 or the like to the SiO 2 or polysilicon film formed by the LPCVD method or the like obtained by thermal oxidation.
- the data line 270, the gate line 266, the source electrode 268, and the drain electrode 269 included in the TFT 264 can be formed using a known conductive material. Examples of the material of the data line 270, the gate line 266, the source electrode 268, and the drain electrode 269 include tantalum (Ta), aluminum (Al), copper (Cu), and the like.
- the TFT 264 can be configured as described above, but the present embodiment is not limited to these materials, structures, and formation methods.
- Examples of the interlayer insulating film used in the present embodiment are the same as those in the first embodiment described above.
- a method for forming the interlayer insulating film the same method as in the first embodiment described above can be used.
- the TFT 264 When light emitted from the organic EL element 212 is extracted from the side opposite to the substrate 211 (second electrode 215 side), external light is incident on the TFT 264 formed on one surface 211a of the substrate 211, and the TFT 264 is electrically connected. It is preferable to use a light-shielding insulating film having a light-shielding property for the purpose of preventing changes in the mechanical characteristics.
- the interlayer insulating film and the light-shielding insulating film can be used in combination. Examples of the material for the light-shielding insulating film include the same materials as those in the first embodiment described above.
- the planarization film 271 can be formed using a known material. Examples of the material for the planarizing film 271 include the same materials as those in the first embodiment described above. Further, the planarization film 271 may have either a single layer structure or a multilayer structure.
- a sealing film 273 for sealing the organic EL element 212 is provided on the surface of the organic EL element 212 (surface facing the phosphor substrate 261).
- the display device 260 includes a pixel portion 273, a gate signal side drive circuit 274, a data signal side drive circuit 275, a signal wiring 276, and a current supply line 277 formed on the organic EL element substrate 262. And a flexible printed wiring board (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “FPC”) 278 connected to the organic EL element substrate 262 and an external drive circuit 290.
- FPC flexible printed wiring board
- the organic EL element substrate 262 is electrically connected via an FPC 279 to an external drive circuit 290 including a scanning line electrode circuit, a data signal electrode circuit, a power supply circuit and the like for driving the organic EL element 212.
- a switching circuit such as a TFT 264 is disposed in the pixel portion 274, and a data signal side driving circuit for driving the organic EL element 212 to a wiring such as a data line 270 and a gate line 266 to which the TFT 264 is connected. 276 and a gate signal side driving circuit 275 are connected to each other, and an external driving circuit 290 is connected to these driving circuits via a signal wiring 267.
- a plurality of gate lines 266 and a plurality of data lines 270 are disposed, and a TFT 264 is disposed at an intersection of the gate lines 266 and the data lines 270.
- the organic EL element 212 is driven by a voltage-driven digital gradation method, and two TFTs, a switching TFT and a driving TFT, are arranged for each pixel.
- the driving TFT and the first electrode 213 of the organic EL element 212 Are electrically connected through a contact hole 272 formed in the planarizing film 271.
- a capacitor (not shown) for setting the gate potential of the driving TFT to a constant potential is arranged in one pixel so as to be connected to the gate electrode of the driving TFT.
- the present embodiment is not particularly limited to these, and the driving method may be the voltage driving digital gradation method described above or the current driving analog gradation method.
- the number of TFTs is not particularly limited, and the organic EL element 212 may be driven by the two TFTs described above.
- the organic EL element 212 may be driven using two or more TFTs each having a built-in compensation circuit in the pixel.
- the brightness does not change when viewed from any direction, the color does not change when viewed from any direction, and the power consumption can be reduced.
- a display device can be realized.
- the active matrix driving type organic EL element substrate 262 since the active matrix driving type organic EL element substrate 262 is employed, a display device with excellent display quality can be realized.
- the light emission time of the organic EL element 212 can be extended as compared with passive driving, and the driving current for obtaining desired luminance can be reduced, so that power consumption can be reduced.
- the light emitting region can be expanded regardless of the formation region of the TFT, various wirings, etc., and the aperture ratio of the pixel Can be increased.
- FIG. 24 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a display device according to a fifth embodiment. 24, the same components as those of the light emitting device 30 shown in FIG. 3, the organic EL element substrate 210 shown in FIG. 19, and the display device 260 shown in FIG. To do.
- the display device 300 of the present embodiment has the same configuration as that of the substrate on which the phosphor layer, the light distribution adjusting layer, the barrier, the light absorption layer, and the like are formed in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above.
- a fluorescent substrate 301, an organic EL element substrate (light source) 302, and a liquid crystal element 303 are roughly configured.
- the organic EL element 212 constituting the organic EL element substrate 302 is not divided for each pixel and functions as a planar light source common to all the pixels. Further, the liquid crystal element 303 is configured to be able to control the voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer for each pixel using a pair of electrodes, and to control the transmittance of light emitted from the entire surface of the organic EL element 212 for each pixel. . In other words, the liquid crystal element 303 has a function as an optical shutter that selectively transmits light from the organic EL element substrate 302 for each pixel.
- the liquid crystal element 303 includes, for example, a pair of polarizing plates 311 and 312, transparent electrodes 313 and 314, alignment films 315 and 316, and a substrate 317, and a liquid crystal 318 is sandwiched between the alignment films 315 and 316. It has a structure.
- an optically anisotropic layer is provided between the liquid crystal cell and one of the polarizing plates 311 and 312, or an optical difference is provided between both the liquid crystal cell and the polarizing plates 311 and 312.
- An isotropic layer may be provided.
- a polarizing plate is preferably provided on the light extraction side.
- the polarizing plates 311 and 312 a combination of a conventional linear polarizing plate and a ⁇ / 4 plate can be used. By providing the polarizing plates 311 and 312, reflection of external light from the electrodes of the display device 300 and reflection of external light on the surface of the substrate or the sealing substrate can be prevented, and the contrast of the display device 300 can be improved. it can. In addition, as the polarizing plates 311 and 312, those having an extinction ratio of 10,000 or more at wavelengths of 435 nm or more and 480 nm or less are suitably used.
- the type of liquid crystal cell is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected according to the purpose.
- Examples of the liquid crystal cell include TN mode, VA mode, OCB mode, IPS mode, ECB mode, and the like.
- the liquid crystal element 303 may be passively driven or may be actively driven using a switching element such as a TFT.
- the brightness does not change when viewed from any direction, the color does not change when viewed from any direction, and the power consumption can be reduced.
- a display device can be realized. Further, in the present embodiment, power consumption can be further reduced by combining pixel switching by the liquid crystal element 303 and the organic EL element substrate 302 that functions as a planar light source.
- FIG. 25 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a sixth embodiment of the display device according to the present invention.
- 25 the same components as those of the light-emitting device 30 illustrated in FIG. 3 and the liquid crystal element 303 illustrated in FIG. 24 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.
- the display device 400 of this embodiment has the same configuration as the substrate on which the phosphor layer, the light distribution adjusting layer, the barrier, the light absorption layer, and the like are formed in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above.
- a fluorescent substrate 301, a liquid crystal element 303, and a backlight unit 401 are roughly configured.
- the backlight unit 401 has a light source disposed on the bottom surface or side surface of the backlight unit 401.
- the backlight unit 401 includes, for example, a reflection sheet, a light source, a light guide plate, a first diffusion sheet, a prism sheet, and a second diffusion sheet.
- a brightness enhancement film may be disposed between the backlight unit 401 and the backlight side polarizing plate 311.
- the backlight unit 401 As the backlight unit 401, the light source 402 disposed on the side surface of the backlight unit 401, the light guide plate 403 that guides light from the light source 402 in the surface direction of the liquid crystal element 303, and the liquid crystal from the light guide plate 403 to the liquid crystal What was roughly comprised from the brightness enhancement film 404 which injects light into the element 303 efficiently was illustrated.
- an excellent display device that does not change brightness when viewed from any direction, does not change color when viewed from any direction, and is capable of reducing power consumption. realizable. Further, in the present embodiment, power consumption can be further reduced by combining pixel switching by the liquid crystal element 303 and the backlight unit 401 that functions as a planar light source.
- the display devices of the first to fifth embodiments described above can be applied to, for example, the mobile phone shown in FIG.
- the cellular phone 310 includes a main body 311, a display unit 312, an audio input unit 313, an audio output unit 314, an antenna 315, an operation switch 316, and the like.
- the display unit 312 the display devices of the first to fifth embodiments described above can be suitably applied.
- a high-luminance video can be displayed with low power consumption.
- the display devices of the first to fifth embodiments described above can be applied to, for example, a thin television shown in FIG.
- the thin television 320 includes a main body cabinet 321, a display unit 322, speakers 323, a stand 324, and the like.
- the display unit 322 the display devices of the first to fifth embodiments described above can be suitably applied.
- FIG. 28 is a schematic sectional view showing a lighting device according to the first embodiment.
- the illumination device 330 of this embodiment includes an optical film 331, a phosphor substrate 332, an organic EL element 333, a thermal diffusion sheet 334, a sealing substrate 335, a sealing resin 336, a heat dissipation material 337, and a drive.
- a circuit 338, a wiring 339, and a hook ceiling 340 are roughly configured.
- the organic EL element 333 is generally composed of an anode 341, an organic EL layer 342, and a cathode 343.
- the light distribution adjustment layer in the phosphor substrate 322 may be formed between the substrate and the optical film or on the optical film.
- the phosphor substrate 332 is the same as the substrate on which the phosphor layer, the light distribution adjusting layer, the barrier, the light absorption layer, and the like are formed in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above. Therefore, according to the display device of this embodiment, the brightness does not change even when viewed from any direction, and further, an excellent illumination device capable of reducing power consumption Can be realized.
- FIG. 29 is a schematic sectional view showing a lighting device according to a second embodiment.
- the illuminating device 250 includes a light emitting device 253 that is roughly composed of an excitation light source 281 that emits excitation light and a phosphor substrate 252.
- the phosphor substrate 252 is formed on the substrate, an excitation light source that emits excitation light, a substrate that is disposed opposite to the excitation light source and on which a phosphor layer that is excited by the excitation light and emits fluorescence is formed.
- a light distribution adjusting layer that changes the emission direction of fluorescence emitted from at least the phosphor layer, and a light-reflective barrier on at least one side surface of the phosphor layer along a stacking direction with the substrate;
- the phosphor layer generally includes a wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer formed on an incident surface side on which excitation light is incident.
- Examples of the excitation light source include those similar to the excitation light source in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above.
- Examples of the substrate include the same substrates as those in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above.
- Examples of the phosphor layer include those similar to the phosphor layer in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above.
- Examples of the barrier include the same barriers as those in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above.
- Examples of the light scattering layer include the same light scattering layers as those in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light emitting device described above.
- Examples of the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer include those similar to the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer in the first to sixteenth embodiments of the light-emitting device described above.
- the light emission in the illuminating device 250 is demonstrated.
- the illumination device 250 when excitation light is incident on the phosphor layer from the excitation light source, light is emitted from the phosphor layer isotropically, that is, with equal energy in any direction.
- the luminance viewing angle characteristic of this light is such that the larger the viewing angle is, the larger the viewing angle is between 0 ° and 80 °, since the viewing angle (the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction) is related to the solid angle.
- the viewing angle the angle formed by the surface perpendicular to the light emitting surface and the viewing direction
- this light enters the light distribution adjustment layer through the substrate, and light is scattered in the light distribution adjustment layer to change the traveling direction of the light.
- the light path length in the light distribution adjustment layer is longer in the latter case for light incident perpendicularly to the surface of the light distribution adjustment layer and light incident in an oblique direction. Therefore, the latter light with respect to the former is often scattered in the light distribution adjusting layer.
- a light emission profile in which the luminance increases as the viewing angle increases is changed to a light emission profile in which at least the luminance in the 0 ° direction is equal to or higher than the luminance in the oblique direction through the light distribution adjustment layer.
- the phosphor layer since the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer is provided on the incident surface side on which the excitation light is incident in the phosphor layer, the phosphor layer emits light on the side opposite to the light extraction side (back side).
- the fluorescent component is reflected at the interface between the phosphor layer and the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer, and can be effectively extracted to the outside as light emission on the light extraction side. That is, by providing the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer on the incident surface side where the excitation light is incident on the phosphor layer, the fluorescent component emitted from the phosphor layer can be extracted to the outside very efficiently.
- the prepared green phosphor-forming coating solution was applied onto the substrate using a spinner. Subsequently, it was dried by heating in a vacuum oven (100 ° C., 10 mmHg) for 4 hours to form a green phosphor layer with a film thickness of 2 ⁇ m to obtain a phosphor substrate.
- a blue directional surface light source (backlight) is used as incident light and light at 460 nm is used as the back surface (film) of the phosphor substrate of the comparative example.
- the luminance viewing angle characteristics at 25 ° C. of the fluorescence extracted from the substrate side when it was incident from the (surface side) were measured.
- the relative luminance value (L 60 / L 0 ) in the direction of the viewing angle 60 ° with respect to the luminance value of the viewing angle 0 ° (normal direction) of the blue directional surface light source as incident light was 0.03.
- the relative luminance value (L 60 / L 0 ) in the direction of the viewing angle 60 ° with respect to the luminance value of the viewing angle 0 ° (normal direction) of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor substrate was 1.10. .
- Example 1 In the same manner as in the comparative example, a green phosphor layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m was formed on one surface of the glass substrate.
- 100 g of a toluene solution in which 10% by weight of PMMA was dissolved was added to 0.1 g of Coumarin 545T, and the mixture was heated and stirred to prepare a coating solution for forming a green phosphor.
- a light distribution adjusting layer was formed on one surface of the glass substrate (the surface opposite to the surface on which the phosphor layer was formed).
- a binder for dispersing the light scattering particles Sekisui Plastics Co., Ltd., a resin “LuxPrint 8155” manufactured by Teijin DuPont Co., Ltd. having an average particle size of 4 ⁇ m ) Made techpolymer "SBX-4": 3.59g and Titanium Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
- titanium oxide "R-25” 1.27g with an average particle size of 200nm, and after thorough mixing for 30 minutes in an automatic mortar, Using a dispersion stirrer “Filmix 40-40” manufactured by Primix Co., Ltd., the mixture was pre-stirred for 15 minutes at a stirring speed of 6,000 rpm under an open system at room temperature.
- a 15 ⁇ m thick light distribution adjusting layer was formed on one surface of the glass substrate using a commercially available spin coater. Next, it is heated and dried in a vacuum oven (200 ° C. condition) for 15 minutes to form a light distribution adjustment layer, a glass substrate, a phosphor layer formed on one surface thereof, and a light distribution adjustment formed on the opposite surface.
- a phosphor substrate of Example 1 consisting of layers was obtained.
- a blue directional surface light source (backlight) was used as incident light, and light of 460 nm was emitted from the rear surface of the phosphor substrate of Example 1
- the luminance viewing angle characteristics at 25 ° C. of the fluorescence extracted from the light distribution adjusting layer were measured.
- the relative luminance value (L 60 / L 0 ) in the direction of 60 ° viewing angle with respect to the luminance value in the viewing angle 0 ° (normal direction) of the blue directional surface light source as incident light was 0.03.
- the relative luminance value (L 60 / L 0 ) in the direction of the viewing angle 60 ° with respect to the luminance value of the viewing angle 0 ° (normal direction) of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor substrate was 0.85. .
- Example 2 In the same manner as in Example 1, a green phosphor layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m was formed on one surface of the glass substrate.
- 100 g of a toluene solution in which 10% by weight of PMMA was dissolved was added to 0.1 g of Coumarin 545T, and the mixture was heated and stirred to prepare a coating solution for forming a green phosphor.
- a light distribution adjusting layer was formed on one surface of the glass substrate (the surface opposite to the surface on which the phosphor layer was formed).
- a binder for dispersing the light scattering particles Sekisui Plastics Co., Ltd. having an average particle diameter of 4 ⁇ m on Teijin DuPont's resin “LuxPrint 8155”: 30 g.
- a 5 ⁇ m thick light distribution adjusting layer was formed on one surface of the glass substrate using a commercially available spin coater.
- heat drying for 15 minutes in a vacuum oven (200 ° C condition) to form a light distribution adjustment layer, a glass substrate, a phosphor layer formed on one side thereof, and a light distribution adjustment formed on the opposite side.
- a phosphor substrate of Example 2 consisting of layers was obtained.
- a blue directional surface light source (backlight) was used as incident light, and light of 460 nm was emitted from the rear surface of the phosphor substrate of Example 2 ( When the light was incident from the phosphor layer side), the luminance viewing angle characteristics at 25 ° C. of the fluorescence extracted from the light distribution adjusting layer were measured. As a result, the relative luminance value (L 60 / L 0 ) in the direction of 60 ° viewing angle with respect to the luminance value in the viewing angle 0 ° (normal direction) of the blue directional surface light source as incident light was 0.03.
- the relative luminance value (L 60 / L 0 ) in the direction of the viewing angle of 60 ° with respect to the luminance value of the viewing angle of 0 ° (normal direction) of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor substrate was 0.82. .
- Example 3 A barrier was formed on the glass substrate.
- epoxy resin reffractive index: 1.59
- acrylic resin reffractive index: 1.49
- rutile-type titanium oxide reffractive index: 2.71, particle size 250 nm
- photopolymerization initiator and aromatic
- a negative photosensitive resist was prepared by stirring and mixing a white photosensitive composition comprising a system solvent.
- a negative resist was applied on the glass substrate by a spin coater method. Then, it prebaked at 80 degreeC for 10 minute (s), and formed the coating film with a film thickness of 50 micrometers.
- the coating film was irradiated with i-line (300 mJ / cm 2 ) and exposed. Next, development was performed using an alkaline developer to obtain a pixel pattern structure having a barrier. Next, using a hot air circulation drying oven, post-baking was performed at 140 ° C. for 60 minutes to form a barrier partitioning the pixels.
- a phosphor layer was formed in the opening surrounded by the barrier.
- a phosphor layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m was formed in the opening by a dispenser method using the same phosphor material as in Example 2.
- a light distribution adjusting layer having a thickness of 5 ⁇ m was formed on one surface of the glass substrate (the surface opposite to the surface on which the phosphor layer was formed) using the same light scattering material as in Example 2. Next, it is heated and dried in a vacuum oven (200 ° C. condition) for 15 minutes, a light scattering layer is formed, a glass substrate, a phosphor layer formed on one surface thereof, and a light distribution adjustment layer formed on the other surface thereof Thus, a phosphor substrate of Example 3 consisting of a barrier formed on the side surface of the phosphor layer was obtained.
- a blue directional surface light source (backlight) was used as incident light, and light of 460 nm was emitted from the rear surface of the phosphor substrate of Example 1
- the luminance viewing angle characteristics at 25 ° C. of the fluorescence extracted from the light distribution adjusting layer were measured.
- the relative luminance value (L 60 / L 0 ) in the direction of 60 ° viewing angle with respect to the luminance value in the viewing angle 0 ° (normal direction) of the blue directional surface light source as incident light was 0.03.
- the relative luminance value (L 60 / L 0 ) in the direction of the viewing angle 60 ° with respect to the luminance value of the viewing angle 0 ° (normal direction) of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor substrate was 0.86. .
- Example 4 In the same manner as in Example 3, a barrier layer and a phosphor layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m were formed on the opening on the glass substrate.
- a dielectric multilayer film produced by alternately forming six layers of 1.47) by EB vapor deposition was formed to a thickness of 100 nm by sputtering.
- a light distribution adjusting layer having a film thickness of 5 ⁇ m was formed on one surface of the glass substrate (the surface opposite to the surface on which the phosphor layer was formed) using the same light scattering material as in Example 3.
- heat drying for 15 minutes in a vacuum oven (200 ° C condition) to form a light distribution adjustment layer, a glass substrate, a phosphor layer formed on one side thereof, and a light distribution adjustment formed on the opposite side.
- a phosphor substrate of Example 4 was obtained, comprising a layer, a barrier formed on the side surface of the phosphor layer, and a wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer formed on one surface of the phosphor layer on the excitation light incident surface side.
- a blue directional surface light source (backlight) is used as incident light, and light of 460 nm is emitted from the rear surface of the phosphor substrate of Example 4 ( When the light was incident from the phosphor layer side), the luminance viewing angle characteristic at 25 ° C. of the fluorescence extracted from the light distribution adjusting layer was measured. As a result, the relative luminance value (L 60 / L 0 ) in the direction of 60 ° viewing angle with respect to the luminance value in the viewing angle 0 ° (normal direction) of the blue directional surface light source as incident light was 0.03.
- the relative luminance value (L 60 / L 0 ) in the direction of the viewing angle 60 ° with respect to the luminance value of the viewing angle 0 ° (normal direction) of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor substrate was 0.85. .
- Example 5" A low refractive index layer having a film thickness of 1 ⁇ m was formed on one surface of the same glass substrate as in the comparative example by spin coating.
- TPIR-414 T-3 As a material for the low refractive index layer, “TPIR-414 T-3” manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd. having a refractive index of about 1.2 to 1.3 was used.
- Example 4 a barrier and a phosphor layer having a thickness of 2 ⁇ m were formed on the opening of the barrier on the low refractive index layer.
- a low refractive index layer having a thickness of 1 ⁇ m was formed on the entire surface of the phosphor layer by spin coating on the entire surface on the side on which excitation light is incident.
- a material for the low refractive index layer “TPIR-414 T-3” manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd. having a refractive index of about 1.2 to 1.3 was used.
- a dielectric multilayer film produced by alternately forming six layers by the method was formed to a thickness of 100 nm by the sputtering method.
- a light distribution adjusting layer having a film thickness of 5 ⁇ m was formed on one surface of the glass substrate (the surface opposite to the surface on which the phosphor layer was formed) using the same light scattering material as in Example 4. Next, it is heated and dried in a vacuum oven (200 ° C. condition) for 15 minutes to form a light distribution adjustment layer, a glass substrate, a phosphor layer formed on one surface thereof, and a light distribution adjustment formed on the opposite surface. Layer, a barrier formed on the side surface of the phosphor layer, a wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer formed on one surface of the phosphor layer on the excitation light incident surface side, and a low refractive index layer formed on both sides of the phosphor layer A phosphor substrate of Example 5 consisting of
- the relative luminance value (L 60 / L 0 ) in the direction of the viewing angle 60 ° with respect to the luminance value of the viewing angle 0 ° (normal direction) of the fluorescence emitted from the phosphor substrate was 0.85. .
- Example 6 [Blue organic EL + phosphor method]
- a low refractive index layer having a thickness of 1 ⁇ m was formed on a glass substrate by spin coating.
- TPIR-414 T-3 manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd. having a refractive index of about 1.2 to 1.3 was used.
- a barrier light scattering film
- epoxy resin (refractive index: 1.59), acrylic resin (refractive index: 1.49), rutile-type titanium oxide (refractive index: 2.71, particle size 250 nm), photopolymerization initiator and aromatic
- a negative photosensitive resist was prepared by stirring and mixing a white photosensitive composition comprising a system solvent.
- a negative resist was applied on the glass substrate by a spin coater method. Then, it prebaked at 80 degreeC for 10 minute (s), and formed the coating film with a film thickness of 50 micrometers.
- the coating film was irradiated with i-line (300 mJ / cm 2 ) and exposed. Next, development was performed using an alkaline developer to obtain a pixel pattern structure having a barrier. Next, using a hot air circulation drying oven, post-baking was performed at 140 ° C. for 60 minutes to form a barrier partitioning the pixels.
- a red phosphor layer, a green phosphor layer, and a blue scatterer layer were formed in the opening surrounded by the barrier.
- a method for forming the red phosphor layer, the green phosphor layer, and the blue scatterer layer will be described in detail.
- red phosphor layer In order to form a red phosphor layer, first, 100 g of a dichlorobenzene solution in which 10 wt% polystyrene is dissolved is added to 0.01 g of red phosphor rhodamine 6G, and hollow silica having a refractive index of 1.21 and a particle diameter of 20 nm. was added, and the mixture was heated and stirred to prepare a red phosphor-forming coating solution.
- the produced red phosphor-forming coating solution was applied in a pattern to regions partitioned by the partition walls by a dispenser technique. Subsequently, it was dried by heating in a vacuum oven (200 ° C., 10 mmHg) for 4 hours, and a red phosphor layer was patterned with a film thickness of 5 ⁇ m.
- a green phosphor layer To form a green phosphor layer, first, 100 g of a dichlorobenzene solution in which 10 wt% of polystyrene is dissolved is added to 0.01 g of coumarin, and then 40 g of hollow silica having a refractive index of 1.21 and a particle diameter of 20 nm is added. Then, the mixture was heated and stirred to produce a green phosphor forming coating solution. Next, the produced green phosphor forming coating solution was applied in a pattern to the area partitioned by the partition wall 103 by a dispenser technique. Subsequently, it was dried by heating in a vacuum oven (200 ° C., 10 mmHg) for 4 hours, and a green phosphor layer was patterned with a film thickness of 5 ⁇ m.
- a blue scatterer layer In order to form a blue scatterer layer, first, as a binder for dispersing light scattering particles, a resin “LuxPrint 8155” manufactured by Teijin DuPont Co., Ltd .: 30 g, Sekisui Plastics Co., Ltd. Polymer "SBX-4": 3.59 g and titanium oxide "R-25”: 1.27 g manufactured by Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. with an average particle size of 200 nm are added and thoroughly mixed for 30 minutes in an automatic mortar.
- the prepared blue light scattering layer forming coating solution was applied in a pattern to regions partitioned by the partition walls by a dispenser technique. Subsequently, it was dried by heating in a vacuum oven (200 ° C., 10 mmHg) for 4 hours to form a blue firefly scatterer layer with a film thickness of 5 ⁇ m.
- a low refractive index layer having a thickness of 1 ⁇ m was formed on the entire surface of the red phosphor layer, the green phosphor layer, and the blue scatterer layer on the side where the excitation light is incident by spin coating.
- a material for the low refractive index layer “TPIR-414 T-3” manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd. having a refractive index of about 1.2 to 1.3 was used.
- a dielectric multilayer film produced by alternately forming six layers by the method was formed to a thickness of 100 nm by a sputtering method.
- a light distribution adjusting layer was formed on one surface of the glass substrate (the surface opposite to the surface on which the phosphor layer was formed).
- a binder for dispersing the light scattering particles Sekisui Plastics Co., Ltd. having an average particle diameter of 4 ⁇ m on Teijin DuPont's resin “LuxPrint 8155”: 30 g.
- a 5 ⁇ m thick light distribution adjusting layer was formed on one surface of the glass substrate using a commercially available spin coater. Next, it is heated and dried in a vacuum oven (200 ° C. condition) for 15 minutes to form a light distribution adjustment layer, a glass substrate, a phosphor layer formed on one surface thereof, and a light distribution adjustment formed on the opposite surface.
- a phosphor substrate of Example 6 was obtained comprising a layer, a barrier formed on the side surface of the phosphor layer, and a wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer formed on one surface of the phosphor layer on the excitation light incident surface side.
- a reflective electrode having a thickness of 100 nm made of silver is formed on a glass substrate having a thickness of 0.7 mm by a sputtering method, and a 20 nm-thick indium-tin oxide film is formed on the reflective electrode by a sputtering method.
- a first electrode (anode) was formed by depositing an object (ITO). Thereafter, the first electrode was patterned into 90 stripes with a width of 160 ⁇ m and a pitch of 200 ⁇ m by a conventional photolithography method.
- SiO 2 was laminated on the first electrode by sputtering, and patterned to cover only the edge portion of the first electrode by conventional photolithography.
- a short side of 10 ⁇ m from the end of the first electrode is covered with SiO 2 .
- the substrate on which the first electrode is formed is fixed to a substrate holder in an in-line type resistance heating vapor deposition apparatus, and the pressure is reduced to a vacuum of 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 4 Pa or less to form an organic EL layer including an organic light emitting layer.
- Each layer was formed.
- the formation method of each layer which comprises an organic EL layer is demonstrated in detail.
- 1,1-bis-di-4-tolylamino-phenyl-cyclohexane (TAPC) was used as a hole injection material, and a hole injection layer having a thickness of 100 nm was formed by resistance heating vapor deposition.
- N, N′-di-1-naphthyl-N, N′-diphenyl-1,1′-biphenyl-1,1′-biphenyl-4,4′-diamine is used as a hole transport material.
- a hole transport layer having a thickness of 40 nm was formed by resistance heating vapor deposition.
- This blue organic light-emitting layer comprises 1,4-bis-triphenylsilyl-benzene (UGH-2) (host material) and bis [(4,6-difluorophenyl) -pyridinato-N, C2 ′] picolinate iridium (III) (FIrpic) (blue phosphorescent dopant) was co-deposited at a deposition rate of 1.5 ⁇ / sec and 0.2 ⁇ / sec, respectively.
- a hole blocking layer (thickness: 10 nm) was formed on the organic light emitting layer using 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline (BCP).
- BCP 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline
- an electron transport layer (thickness: 30 nm) was formed on the hole blocking layer using tris (8-hydroxyquinoline) aluminum (Alq 3 ).
- an electron injection layer (thickness: 0.5 nm) was formed on the electron transport layer using lithium fluoride (LiF).
- a semitransparent electrode was formed as the second electrode.
- the substrate was fixed in a metal vapor deposition chamber, and the shadow mask for forming the translucent electrode was aligned with the substrate.
- the shadow mask a mask provided with an opening so that the second electrode can be formed in a stripe shape having a width of 500 ⁇ m and a pitch of 600 ⁇ m in a direction facing the stripe of the first electrode.
- magnesium and silver are co-deposited on the surface of the electron injection layer by vacuum deposition at a deposition rate of 0.1 ⁇ / sec and 0.9 ⁇ / sec, respectively, thereby forming magnesium silver in a desired pattern ( (Thickness: 1 nm). Furthermore, silver is formed in a desired pattern at a deposition rate of 1 mm / sec (thickness: 19 nm) for the purpose of emphasizing the interference effect and preventing voltage drop due to wiring resistance at the second electrode. )did. A semitransparent electrode was formed by the above treatment.
- a microcavity effect (interference effect) appears between the first electrode and the second electrode, and the front luminance can be increased. Thereby, the light emission energy from an organic EL layer can be efficiently propagated to the light extraction part side. Similarly, the emission peak was adjusted to 460 nm and the half value width to 50 nm by the microcavity effect.
- an inorganic protective layer made of SiO 2 having a thickness of 3 ⁇ m was formed by patterning by plasma CVD using a shadow mask from the edge of the display portion to a sealing area of 2 mm in the vertical and horizontal directions.
- an organic EL element substrate on which an organic EL element was formed was obtained.
- the organic EL element substrate and the phosphor substrate produced as described above were aligned using an alignment marker formed outside the pixel arrangement position.
- a thermosetting resin was applied to the phosphor substrate in advance.
- the two substrates are brought into close contact with each other through a thermosetting resin, and heated at 80 ° C. for 2 hours to cure the thermosetting resin, and the organic EL element substrate and the phosphor The substrates were bonded together. Note that the step of bonding the two substrates was performed in a dry air environment (water content: ⁇ 80 ° C.) in order to prevent the organic layer from being deteriorated by moisture.
- an organic EL display device of Example 6 was completed by connecting terminals formed in the periphery to an external power source.
- the blue light-emitting organic EL element is used as an excitation light source that can be arbitrarily switched, and blue light is converted into red light by a red phosphor layer.
- red and green light emission can be obtained, and blue light emission can be obtained through the blue scatterer layer. It can be matched by the light distribution adjustment layer.
- full-color display was possible, and a good image and a display with good viewing angle characteristics that did not change in brightness or color even when viewed from any direction were obtained.
- Example 7 [active drive type blue organic EL + phosphor method] A phosphor substrate was produced in the same manner as in Example 6.
- An amorphous silicon semiconductor film was formed on a 100 ⁇ 100 mm square glass substrate by PECVD. Next, a polycrystalline silicon semiconductor film was formed by performing a crystallization treatment. Next, the polycrystalline silicon semiconductor film was patterned into a plurality of islands using a photolithography method. Next, a gate insulating film and a gate electrode layer were formed in this order on the patterned polycrystalline silicon semiconductor layer, and patterning was performed using a photolithography method.
- the patterned polycrystalline silicon semiconductor film was doped with an impurity element such as phosphorus to form source and drain regions, and a TFT element was fabricated. Thereafter, a planarizing film was formed.
- a silicon nitride film formed by PECVD and an acrylic resin layer formed by spin coater were laminated in this order.
- the planarizing film First, after a silicon nitride film was formed, the silicon nitride film and the gate insulating film were collectively etched to form a contact hole leading to the source and / or drain region, and then a source wiring was formed.
- the capacitor for setting the gate potential of the TFT to a constant potential is formed by interposing an insulating film such as an interlayer insulating film between the drain of the switching TFT and the source of the driving TFT.
- the first electrode (anode) of each pixel is formed by sputtering so as to be electrically connected to the contact hole provided through the planarization layer connected to the TFT for driving each light emitting pixel. Formed.
- the first electrode was formed by laminating an Al (aluminum) film having a thickness of 150 nm and an IZO (indium oxide-zinc oxide) film having a thickness of 20 nm.
- the first electrode was patterned into a shape corresponding to each pixel by a conventional photolithography method.
- the area of the first electrode was 300 ⁇ m ⁇ 160 ⁇ m. Further, it was formed on a 100 ⁇ 100 square substrate.
- the display unit was 80 mm ⁇ 80 mm, a 2 mm wide sealing area was provided on the top, bottom, left, and right of the display unit, and a 2 mm terminal lead-out unit was further provided outside the sealing area on the short side of the display unit.
- a 2 mm terminal extraction part was provided in the direction of bending.
- the active matrix substrate on which the first electrode was formed was washed.
- a method for cleaning the active matrix substrate for example, acetone and isopropyl alcohol were used for ultrasonic cleaning for 10 minutes, followed by UV-ozone cleaning for 30 minutes.
- the active matrix substrate on which the first electrode is formed is fixed to a substrate holder in an in-line resistance heating vapor deposition apparatus, and the pressure is reduced to a vacuum of 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 4 Pa or less, and an organic EL layer including an organic light emitting layer is formed Each constituent layer was formed.
- the formation method of each layer which comprises an organic EL layer is demonstrated in detail.
- 1,1-bis-di-4-tolylamino-phenyl-cyclohexane (TAPC) was used as a hole injection material, and a hole injection layer having a thickness of 100 nm was formed by resistance heating vapor deposition.
- N, N′-di-1-naphthyl-N, N ′ ′-diphenyl-1,1′-biphenyl-1,1′-biphenyl-4,4′4-diamine is used as a hole transport material.
- a hole transport layer having a thickness of 40 nm was formed by resistance heating vapor deposition.
- a blue organic light emitting layer was formed at a desired pixel position on the hole transport layer.
- This blue organic light-emitting layer comprises 1,4-bis-triphenylsilyl-benzene (UGH-2) (host material) and bis [(4,6-difluorophenyl) -pyridinato-N, C2 ′] picolinate iridium (III) (FIrpic) (blue phosphorescent dopant) was co-deposited at a deposition rate of 1.5 ⁇ / sec and 0.2 ⁇ / sec, respectively.
- a hole blocking layer (thickness: 10 nm) was formed on the organic light emitting layer using 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline (BCP).
- BCP 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline
- an electron transport layer (thickness: 30 nm) was formed on the hole blocking layer using tris (8-hydroxyquinoline) aluminum (Alq 3 ).
- an electron injection layer (thickness: 0.5 nm) was formed on the electron transport layer using lithium fluoride (LiF).
- a semitransparent electrode was formed as the second electrode.
- the active matrix substrate on which the organic EL layer was formed was fixed in a metal deposition chamber, and the shadow mask for forming the translucent electrode and the active matrix substrate were aligned.
- the shadow mask a mask provided with an opening so that the second electrode can be formed in a stripe shape having a width of 2 mm in a direction facing the stripe of the first electrode.
- magnesium and silver are co-deposited on the surface of the electron injection layer by vacuum deposition at a deposition rate of 0.1 ⁇ / sec and 0.9 ⁇ / sec, respectively, thereby forming magnesium silver in a desired pattern ( (Thickness: 1 nm). Furthermore, silver is formed in a desired pattern at a deposition rate of 1 mm / sec (thickness: 19 nm) for the purpose of emphasizing the interference effect and preventing voltage drop due to wiring resistance at the second electrode. )did. A semitransparent electrode was formed by the above treatment.
- a microcavity effect (interference effect) appears between the first electrode and the second electrode, and the front luminance can be increased. Thereby, the light emission energy from an organic EL layer can be efficiently propagated to the light extraction part side. Similarly, the emission peak was adjusted to 460 nm and the half value width to 50 nm by the microcavity effect.
- an inorganic protective layer made of SiO 2 having a thickness of 3 ⁇ m was formed by patterning by plasma CVD using a shadow mask from the edge of the display portion to a sealing area of 2 mm in the vertical and horizontal directions.
- an active drive type organic EL element substrate on which an organic EL element was formed was obtained.
- the active drive type organic EL element substrate and the phosphor substrate manufactured as described above were aligned using an alignment marker formed outside the pixel arrangement position.
- a thermosetting resin was applied to the phosphor substrate in advance.
- the two substrates After aligning the active drive type organic EL element substrate and the phosphor substrate, the two substrates are brought into close contact with each other through a thermosetting resin, and the thermosetting resin is cured by heating at 90 ° C. for 2 hours. And a phosphor substrate were bonded together.
- the step of bonding the two substrates was performed in a dry air environment (water content: ⁇ 80 ° C.) in order to prevent the organic layer from being deteriorated by moisture.
- a polarizing plate was bonded to the substrate in the light extraction direction to obtain an active drive type organic EL element.
- the terminal formed on the short side is connected to the power supply circuit via the source driver, and the terminal formed on the long side is connected to the external power supply via the gate driver, thereby 80 ⁇
- An active drive organic EL display device having a display portion of 80 mm was completed.
- the blue light-emitting organic EL element is used as an excitation light source that can be arbitrarily switched, and blue light is converted into red light by a red phosphor layer.
- red and green light emission can be obtained, and blue light emission can be obtained through the blue scatterer layer. It can be matched by the light distribution adjustment layer. Chromaticity shift As a result, full-color display is possible, and a good image and a display with good viewing angle characteristics with no change in brightness or color even when viewed from any direction were obtained.
- Example 8 [Blue LED + phosphor method] A phosphor substrate was produced in the same manner as in Example 6.
- a buffer layer made of GaN was grown to a thickness of 60 nm on the C surface of the sapphire substrate set in the reaction vessel at 550 ° C.
- the temperature was raised to 1050 ° C.
- an n-type contact layer made of Si-doped n-type GaN was grown to a thickness of 5 ⁇ m using SiH 4 gas in addition to TMG and NH 3 .
- TMA trimethylaluminum
- a second cladding layer composed of a Si-doped n-type Al 0.3 Ga 0.7 N layer was grown at a thickness of 0.2 ⁇ m at 1050 ° C. .
- the temperature is lowered to 850 ° C., and the first n-type cladding layer made of Si-doped n-type In 0.01 Ga 0.99 N is made 60 nm using TMG, TMI (trimethylindium), NH 3 and SiH 4. It was made to grow with the film thickness.
- an active layer made of non-doped In 0.05 Ga 0.95 N was grown to a thickness of 5 nm at 850 ° C. using TMG, TMI, and NH 3 .
- a first p-type cladding layer made of Mg-doped p-type In 0.01 Ga 0.99 N at 850 ° C. using CPMg (cyclopentadienyl magnesium) newly. was grown to a thickness of 60 nm.
- a second p-type cladding layer made of Mg-doped p-type Al 0.3 Ga 0.7 N is grown to a thickness of 150 nm using TMG, TMA, NH 3 , CPMg I let you.
- a p-type contact layer made of Mg-doped p-type GaN was grown to a thickness of 600 nm using TMG, NH 3 and CPMg at 1100 ° C. After the above operation was completed, the temperature was lowered to room temperature, the wafer was taken out of the reaction vessel, and the wafer was annealed at 720 ° C. to reduce the resistance of the p-type layer.
- a mask having a predetermined shape was formed on the surface of the uppermost p-type contact layer, and etching was performed until the surface of the n-type contact layer was exposed.
- a negative electrode made of titanium (Ti) and aluminum (Al) was formed on the surface of the n-type contact layer, and a positive electrode made of nickel (Ni) and gold (Au) was formed on the surface of the p-type contact layer.
- the LED chip is fixed with a UV curable resin on a substrate on which wiring for connecting to a separately prepared external circuit is formed. The wiring on the substrate was electrically connected to obtain a light source substrate made of a blue LED.
- thermosetting resin was applied to the phosphor substrate in advance.
- the two substrates After aligning the light source substrate and the phosphor substrate, the two substrates are brought into close contact with each other through the thermosetting resin, and heated at 80 ° C. for 2 hours to cure the thermosetting resin, and the organic EL element substrate and the phosphor substrate. Were pasted together.
- the step of bonding the two substrates was performed in a dry air environment (water content: ⁇ 80 ° C.) in order to prevent the organic layer from being deteriorated by moisture.
- the LED display device of Example 7 was completed by connecting the terminals formed in the periphery to an external power source.
- the blue light-emitting organic EL element is used as an excitation light source that can be arbitrarily switched, and blue light is converted into red light by a red phosphor layer.
- red and green light emission can be obtained, and blue light emission can be obtained through the blue scatterer layer. It can be matched by the light distribution adjustment layer. As a result, full-color display was possible, and a good image and a display with good viewing angle characteristics that did not change in brightness or color even when viewed from any direction were obtained.
- the display device of Example 8 measured chromaticity viewing angle characteristics when all 24 colors of Macbeth color were displayed. .
- it is said that when the value of the color change ⁇ u′v ′ is about 0.015 or less, a color difference cannot be detected by human eyes.
- Example 9 [blue organic EL + liquid crystal + phosphor method] A low refractive index layer having a thickness of 1 ⁇ m was formed on a glass substrate by spin coating. As a material for the low refractive index layer, “TPIR-414 T-3” manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd. having a refractive index of about 1.2 to 1.3 was used. Next, a barrier (light scattering film) was formed on the low refractive index layer. Hereinafter, the method of forming the barrier will be described in detail.
- epoxy resin (refractive index: 1.59), acrylic resin (refractive index: 1.49), rutile-type titanium oxide (refractive index: 2.71, particle size 250 nm), photopolymerization initiator and aromatic
- a negative photosensitive resist was prepared by stirring and mixing a white photosensitive composition comprising a system solvent.
- a negative resist was applied on the glass substrate by a spin coater method. Then, it prebaked at 80 degreeC for 10 minute (s), and formed the coating film with a film thickness of 50 micrometers. After covering this coating film with a mask capable of forming a desired image pattern, the coating film was irradiated with i-line (300 mJ / cm 2 ) and exposed.
- a red phosphor layer, a green phosphor layer, and a blue scatterer layer were formed in the opening surrounded by the barrier.
- a method for forming the red phosphor layer, the green phosphor layer, and the blue scatterer layer will be described in detail.
- red phosphor layer In order to form a red phosphor layer, first, 100 g of a dichlorobenzene solution in which 10 wt% polystyrene is dissolved is added to 0.01 g of red phosphor rhodamine 6G, and hollow silica having a refractive index of 1.21 and a particle diameter of 20 nm. was added, and the mixture was heated and stirred to prepare a red phosphor-forming coating solution.
- the produced red phosphor-forming coating solution was applied in a pattern to regions partitioned by the partition walls by a dispenser technique. Subsequently, it was dried by heating in a vacuum oven (200 ° C., 10 mmHg) for 4 hours, and a red phosphor layer was patterned with a film thickness of 5 ⁇ m.
- a green phosphor layer To form a green phosphor layer, first, 100 g of a dichlorobenzene solution in which 10 wt% of polystyrene is dissolved is added to 0.01 g of coumarin, and then 40 g of hollow silica having a refractive index of 1.21 and a particle diameter of 20 nm is added. Then, the mixture was heated and stirred to produce a green phosphor forming coating solution.
- the prepared green phosphor forming coating solution was applied in a pattern to the area partitioned by the partition wall 103 by a dispenser method. Subsequently, it was dried by heating in a vacuum oven (200 ° C., 10 mmHg) for 4 hours, and a green phosphor layer was patterned with a film thickness of 5 ⁇ m.
- a blue scatterer layer In order to form a blue scatterer layer, first, as a binder for dispersing light scattering particles, a resin “LuxPrint 8155” manufactured by Teijin DuPont Co., Ltd .: 30 g, and Sekisui Plastics Co., Ltd. Polymer "SBX-4": 3.59 g and titanium oxide "R-25”: 1.27 g manufactured by Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. with an average particle size of 200 nm are added and thoroughly mixed for 30 minutes in an automatic mortar.
- a low refractive index layer having a thickness of 1 ⁇ m was formed on the entire surface of the red phosphor layer, the green phosphor layer, and the blue scatterer layer on the side on which the excitation light is incident by spin coating.
- a material for the low refractive index layer “TPIR-414 T-3” manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd. having a refractive index of about 1.2 to 1.3 was used.
- a dielectric multilayer film produced by alternately forming six layers by the method was formed to a thickness of 100 nm by a sputtering method.
- a light distribution adjusting layer was formed on one surface of the glass substrate (the surface opposite to the surface on which the phosphor layer was formed).
- a binder for dispersing the light scattering particles Sekisui Plastics Co., Ltd. having an average particle diameter of 4 ⁇ m on Teijin DuPont's resin “LuxPrint 8155”: 30 g.
- a 5 ⁇ m thick light distribution adjusting layer was formed on one surface of the glass substrate using a commercially available spin coater.
- a flattening film is formed on the wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer by spin coating using an acrylic resin, and a polarizing film, a transparent electrode, and a light distribution film are formed on the flattening film by a conventional method.
- a glass substrate, a phosphor layer formed on one surface thereof, a light distribution adjusting layer formed on the opposite surface, a barrier formed on a side surface of the phosphor layer, and excitation of the phosphor layer A phosphor substrate of Example 9 comprising a wavelength selective transmission / reflection layer formed on one surface of the light incident surface side was obtained.
- a switching element made of TFT was formed on the glass substrate by a conventional method.
- an ITO transparent electrode having a film thickness of 100 nm was formed so as to be in electrical contact with the TFT through the contact hole.
- the transparent electrode was patterned by a normal photolithography method so as to have the same pitch as the pixels of the organic EL portion that had been prepared in advance.
- an alignment film was formed by a printing method.
- the substrate on which the TFT is formed and the phosphor substrate are bonded via a spacer having a thickness of 10 ⁇ m, and a TN mode liquid crystal material is injected between both substrates to complete the liquid crystal / phosphor portion. .
- a reflective electrode having a thickness of 100 nm made of silver is formed on a glass substrate having a thickness of 0.7 mm by a sputtering method, and a 20 nm-thick indium-tin oxide film is formed on the reflective electrode by a sputtering method.
- a first electrode (anode) was formed by depositing an object (ITO). Then, it patterned so that the width
- SiO 2 was laminated on the first electrode by sputtering, and patterned to cover only the edge portion of the first electrode by conventional photolithography.
- a short side of 10 ⁇ m from the end of the first electrode is covered with SiO 2 .
- the substrate on which the first electrode is formed is fixed to a substrate holder in an in-line type resistance heating vapor deposition apparatus, and the pressure is reduced to a vacuum of 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 4 Pa or less to form an organic EL layer including an organic light emitting layer.
- Each layer was formed.
- the formation method of each layer which comprises an organic EL layer is demonstrated in detail.
- 1,1-bis-di-4-tolylamino-phenyl-cyclohexane (TAPC) was used as a hole injection material, and a hole injection layer having a thickness of 100 nm was formed by resistance heating vapor deposition.
- CBP carbazole biphenyl
- a 10 nm-thick hole transport layer was formed by resistance heating vapor deposition.
- a near ultraviolet organic light emitting layer (thickness: 30 nm) was formed at a desired pixel position on the hole transport layer.
- This near-ultraviolet organic light-emitting layer is formed by depositing 3,5-bis (4-tert-butyl-phenyl) -4-phenyl- [1,2,4] triazole (TAZ) (near-ultraviolet phosphorescent material) at a deposition rate of 1 It was formed by vapor deposition at a rate of 5 cm / sec.
- a hole blocking layer (thickness: 20 nm) was formed on the organic light emitting layer using 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline (BCP).
- BCP 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline
- an electron transport layer (thickness: 30 nm) was formed on the hole blocking layer using tris (8-hydroxyquinoline) aluminum (Alq 3 ).
- an electron injection layer (thickness: 0.5 nm) was formed on the electron transport layer using lithium fluoride (LiF).
- a semitransparent electrode was formed as the second electrode.
- the substrate was fixed to a metal deposition chamber, and the shadow mask for forming the translucent electrode was aligned with the substrate.
- the shadow mask a mask provided with an opening so that the second electrode can be formed in a stripe shape having a width of 500 ⁇ m and a pitch of 600 ⁇ m in a direction facing the stripe of the first electrode.
- magnesium and silver are co-deposited on the surface of the electron injection layer by vacuum deposition at a deposition rate of 0.1 ⁇ / sec and 0.9 ⁇ / sec, respectively, thereby forming magnesium silver in a desired pattern ( (Thickness: 1 nm). Furthermore, silver is formed in a desired pattern at a deposition rate of 1 mm / sec (thickness: 19 nm) for the purpose of emphasizing the interference effect and preventing voltage drop due to wiring resistance at the second electrode. )did. A semitransparent electrode was formed by the above treatment.
- a microcavity effect appears between the first electrode and the second electrode, and the front luminance can be increased. Thereby, the light emission energy from an organic EL layer can be efficiently propagated to the light extraction part side. Similarly, the emission peak was adjusted to 370 nm and the half-value width to 30 nm by the microcavity effect.
- an inorganic protective layer made of SiO 2 having a thickness of 3 ⁇ m was formed by patterning by plasma CVD using a shadow mask from the edge of the display portion to a sealing area of 2 mm in the vertical and horizontal directions.
- an organic EL element substrate on which an organic EL element was formed was obtained.
- the organic EL element substrate and the phosphor substrate produced as described above were aligned using an alignment marker formed outside the pixel arrangement position.
- a thermosetting resin was applied to the phosphor substrate in advance.
- the two substrates After aligning the organic EL element substrate and the phosphor substrate, the two substrates are brought into close contact with each other through a thermosetting resin, and heated at 80 ° C. for 2 hours to cure the thermosetting resin, and the organic EL element substrate and the phosphor The substrates were bonded together.
- the step of bonding the two substrates was performed in a dry air environment (water content: ⁇ 80 ° C.) in order to prevent the organic layer from being deteriorated by moisture.
- an organic EL display device of Example 8 was completed by connecting terminals formed in the periphery to an external power source.
- the blue light-emitting organic EL element is used as an excitation light source that can be arbitrarily switched, and blue light is converted into red light by a red phosphor layer.
- red and green light emission can be obtained, and blue light emission can be obtained through the blue scatterer layer. It can be matched by the light distribution adjustment layer.
- full-color display was possible, and a good image and a display with good viewing angle characteristics that did not change in brightness or color even when viewed from any direction were obtained.
- the display device of Example 9 measured chromaticity viewing angle characteristics when all 24 colors of Macbeth color were displayed. .
- Example 10 [blue backlight + liquid crystal + phosphor method] In the same manner as in Example 9, a liquid crystal / phosphor substrate portion was formed.
- a light source As the directional blue backlight, a light source, a light guide plate, a reflection sheet, a brightness enhancement film, and a condensing lens were used.
- a light source an LED “NFSC036C” manufactured by Nichia Corporation having a peak wavelength of 465 nm was used and arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate.
- the light guide plate As the light guide plate, a polycarbonate resin formed into a wedge shape by injection molding was used.
- a reflective sheet “ESR” manufactured by 3M was used for the bottom surface of the light guide plate (the LED was provided on the side of the wedge-shaped light guide plate having the larger cross-sectional area).
- the brightness enhancement film “DBEFD400” manufactured by 3M Co., Ltd. and the condensing Fresnel lens “CF3-0.1” manufactured by Nippon Special Optical Resin Co., Ltd. are mounted in this order on the upper surface side (outgoing surface side) of the light guide plate. Completed the backlight.
- the terminal formed in the periphery was connected to an external power source to complete the liquid crystal display device of Example 10.
- the emitted light from the directional blue backlight is used as an excitation light source that can be arbitrarily switched, and blue light is converted into red by a red phosphor film.
- blue light is converted into green light with the green phosphor film.
- isotropic light emission of red and green is obtained, and isotropic blue light emission is achieved through the blue scatterer film.
- the light distribution adjustment layer provided on the phosphor layer and the scatterer layer provides a display that does not change in brightness when viewed from any direction and does not change color when viewed from any direction. It was. Thereby, full color display was possible, and a good image and an image with good viewing angle characteristics could be obtained.
- the present invention can be used for a phosphor substrate, various light emitting devices using the phosphor substrate, a display device, and a lighting device.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Nonlinear Science (AREA)
- Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Mathematical Physics (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
- Optical Filters (AREA)
- Liquid Crystal (AREA)
- Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
- Led Device Packages (AREA)
Abstract
L'invention a pour objectif de fournir un substrat de luminophore, un dispositif luminescent, un dispositif d'affichage, et un dispositif d'éclairage qui présentent des caractéristiques d'affichage couleur d'angle de vision satisfaisantes ne changeant pas les teintes selon l'angle de vision. Dans le substrat de luminophore, sont formés : un substrat qui est excité par une lumière d'excitation, et dans lequel une couche de luminophore générant une fluorescence est formée sur une de ses faces ; et une couche d'ajustement de distribution lumineuse, entre ledit substrat et ladite couche de luminophore, qui change la direction de luminescence de la fluorescence émise par au moins ladite couche de luminophore.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2012129742A JP2013254651A (ja) | 2012-06-07 | 2012-06-07 | 蛍光体基板、発光デバイス、表示装置、及び照明装置 |
JP2012-129742 | 2012-06-07 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2013183751A1 true WO2013183751A1 (fr) | 2013-12-12 |
Family
ID=49712137
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2013/065789 WO2013183751A1 (fr) | 2012-06-07 | 2013-06-07 | Substrat de luminophore, dispositif luminescent, dispositif d'affichage, et dispositif d'éclairage |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP2013254651A (fr) |
WO (1) | WO2013183751A1 (fr) |
Cited By (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP3001246A1 (fr) * | 2014-09-26 | 2016-03-30 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Élément de conversion de longueur d'onde, dispositif de source lumineuse et projecteur |
WO2017102708A1 (fr) * | 2015-12-18 | 2017-06-22 | Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der angewandten Forschung e.V. | Convertisseur pour générer une lumière secondaire à partir d'une lumière primaire, moyen d'éclairage contenant de tels convertisseurs et procédé de fabrication de convertisseurs et de moyens d'éclairage |
WO2017140512A1 (fr) * | 2016-02-19 | 2017-08-24 | Osram Oled Gmbh | Composant électroluminescent et procédé de fabrication d'un composant électroluminescent |
CN109426042A (zh) * | 2017-08-23 | 2019-03-05 | 三星显示有限公司 | 显示设备 |
WO2020227518A1 (fr) * | 2019-05-08 | 2020-11-12 | Nanosys, Inc. | Dispositifs d'affichage à base de nanostructures ayant une efficacité d'extraction de lumière améliorée |
US20200395423A1 (en) * | 2019-06-13 | 2020-12-17 | Intel Corporation | Micro light-emitting diode displays with improved power efficiency |
Families Citing this family (15)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
KR102157244B1 (ko) * | 2013-12-20 | 2020-09-18 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | 파장 변환체 및 이를 포함하는 액정표시장치 |
KR101751736B1 (ko) * | 2014-01-29 | 2017-06-30 | 성균관대학교산학협력단 | 기능성 입자층 및 이의 제조 방법 |
DE102014112883A1 (de) | 2014-09-08 | 2016-03-10 | Osram Opto Semiconductors Gmbh | Optoelektronisches Bauteil |
KR102223001B1 (ko) | 2015-01-05 | 2021-03-04 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | 표시 장치 |
KR102345438B1 (ko) * | 2015-01-05 | 2021-12-30 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | 표시 장치 |
JP2016170313A (ja) * | 2015-03-13 | 2016-09-23 | 大日本印刷株式会社 | カラーフィルタ及び電子ペーパー |
JP2017027019A (ja) * | 2015-07-22 | 2017-02-02 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | 光源装置 |
KR20180093689A (ko) | 2017-02-14 | 2018-08-22 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Led 장치 및 그 제조 방법 |
WO2018221216A1 (fr) * | 2017-06-02 | 2018-12-06 | 東レ株式会社 | Feuille de conversion de couleur, unité de source de lumière la comprenant, afficheur et dispositif d'éclairage |
WO2019106790A1 (fr) * | 2017-11-30 | 2019-06-06 | シャープ株式会社 | Dispositif d'affichage, procédé de fabrication de dispositif d'affichage et appareil de fabrication de dispositif d'affichage |
JP2019135738A (ja) * | 2018-02-05 | 2019-08-15 | 株式会社ブイ・テクノロジー | フルカラーled表示パネル及びその製造方法 |
JP2019140361A (ja) * | 2018-02-15 | 2019-08-22 | 株式会社ブイ・テクノロジー | フルカラーled表示パネル及びその製造方法 |
US20220045303A1 (en) * | 2019-03-11 | 2022-02-10 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Display device |
US20240120449A1 (en) | 2021-02-18 | 2024-04-11 | Sony Semiconductor Solutions Corporation | Light emitting device and display device |
JP2022155737A (ja) * | 2021-03-31 | 2022-10-14 | 日東電工株式会社 | マイクロledディスプレイ装置 |
Citations (11)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH07168006A (ja) * | 1993-09-24 | 1995-07-04 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | 反射防止膜、反射防止フィルムおよびその製造方法 |
JPH1154273A (ja) * | 1997-08-01 | 1999-02-26 | Idemitsu Kosan Co Ltd | 色変換フィルタおよびその製造方法 |
JP2005123088A (ja) * | 2003-10-17 | 2005-05-12 | Fuji Electric Holdings Co Ltd | 色変換フィルタおよびそれを用いた有機elディスプレイ |
JP2005251488A (ja) * | 2004-03-03 | 2005-09-15 | Hitachi Displays Ltd | 発光素子,発光型表示装置及び照明装置 |
WO2006022123A1 (fr) * | 2004-08-26 | 2006-03-02 | Idemitsu Kosan Co., Ltd. | Dispositif d’affichage electroluminescent organique |
JP2006228677A (ja) * | 2005-02-21 | 2006-08-31 | Matsushita Toshiba Picture Display Co Ltd | 多色発光装置 |
JP2010250259A (ja) * | 2009-03-27 | 2010-11-04 | Epson Imaging Devices Corp | 液晶表示装置 |
JP2011515851A (ja) * | 2008-03-19 | 2011-05-19 | クリー インコーポレイテッド | Ledデバイスの低屈折率スペーサ層 |
WO2011125363A1 (fr) * | 2010-04-07 | 2011-10-13 | シャープ株式会社 | Élément à électroluminescence organique, dispositif d'affichage à électroluminescence organique et appareil d'affichage à électroluminescence organique |
JP2011233269A (ja) * | 2010-04-23 | 2011-11-17 | Panasonic Electric Works Co Ltd | 照明装置 |
WO2011145247A1 (fr) * | 2010-05-18 | 2011-11-24 | シャープ株式会社 | Dispositif d'affichage |
-
2012
- 2012-06-07 JP JP2012129742A patent/JP2013254651A/ja active Pending
-
2013
- 2013-06-07 WO PCT/JP2013/065789 patent/WO2013183751A1/fr active Application Filing
Patent Citations (11)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH07168006A (ja) * | 1993-09-24 | 1995-07-04 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | 反射防止膜、反射防止フィルムおよびその製造方法 |
JPH1154273A (ja) * | 1997-08-01 | 1999-02-26 | Idemitsu Kosan Co Ltd | 色変換フィルタおよびその製造方法 |
JP2005123088A (ja) * | 2003-10-17 | 2005-05-12 | Fuji Electric Holdings Co Ltd | 色変換フィルタおよびそれを用いた有機elディスプレイ |
JP2005251488A (ja) * | 2004-03-03 | 2005-09-15 | Hitachi Displays Ltd | 発光素子,発光型表示装置及び照明装置 |
WO2006022123A1 (fr) * | 2004-08-26 | 2006-03-02 | Idemitsu Kosan Co., Ltd. | Dispositif d’affichage electroluminescent organique |
JP2006228677A (ja) * | 2005-02-21 | 2006-08-31 | Matsushita Toshiba Picture Display Co Ltd | 多色発光装置 |
JP2011515851A (ja) * | 2008-03-19 | 2011-05-19 | クリー インコーポレイテッド | Ledデバイスの低屈折率スペーサ層 |
JP2010250259A (ja) * | 2009-03-27 | 2010-11-04 | Epson Imaging Devices Corp | 液晶表示装置 |
WO2011125363A1 (fr) * | 2010-04-07 | 2011-10-13 | シャープ株式会社 | Élément à électroluminescence organique, dispositif d'affichage à électroluminescence organique et appareil d'affichage à électroluminescence organique |
JP2011233269A (ja) * | 2010-04-23 | 2011-11-17 | Panasonic Electric Works Co Ltd | 照明装置 |
WO2011145247A1 (fr) * | 2010-05-18 | 2011-11-24 | シャープ株式会社 | Dispositif d'affichage |
Cited By (13)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN105467734A (zh) * | 2014-09-26 | 2016-04-06 | 精工爱普生株式会社 | 波长转换元件、光源装置、投影仪 |
EP3001246A1 (fr) * | 2014-09-26 | 2016-03-30 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Élément de conversion de longueur d'onde, dispositif de source lumineuse et projecteur |
US9874741B2 (en) | 2014-09-26 | 2018-01-23 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Wavelength conversion element, light source device, and projector |
US10647915B2 (en) | 2015-12-18 | 2020-05-12 | Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft Zur Foerderung Der Angewandten Forschung E.V. | Converter for generating a secondary light from a primary light, light-emitting elements which contains such a converter, and method for producing the converter and the light-emitting elements |
WO2017102708A1 (fr) * | 2015-12-18 | 2017-06-22 | Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der angewandten Forschung e.V. | Convertisseur pour générer une lumière secondaire à partir d'une lumière primaire, moyen d'éclairage contenant de tels convertisseurs et procédé de fabrication de convertisseurs et de moyens d'éclairage |
CN109618560B (zh) * | 2015-12-18 | 2021-12-21 | 弗劳恩霍夫应用研究促进协会 | 用于由初级光产生次级光的转换器、包括转换器的照明装置和制造转换器及照明装置的方法 |
CN109618560A (zh) * | 2015-12-18 | 2019-04-12 | 弗劳恩霍夫应用研究促进协会 | 用于由初级光产生次级光的转换器、包括这种转换器的照明装置以及用于制造所述转换器和照明装置的方法 |
WO2017140512A1 (fr) * | 2016-02-19 | 2017-08-24 | Osram Oled Gmbh | Composant électroluminescent et procédé de fabrication d'un composant électroluminescent |
CN109426042A (zh) * | 2017-08-23 | 2019-03-05 | 三星显示有限公司 | 显示设备 |
WO2020227518A1 (fr) * | 2019-05-08 | 2020-11-12 | Nanosys, Inc. | Dispositifs d'affichage à base de nanostructures ayant une efficacité d'extraction de lumière améliorée |
US11988922B2 (en) | 2019-05-08 | 2024-05-21 | Shoei Chemical Inc. | Nanostructure based display devices with improved light extraction efficiency |
US20200395423A1 (en) * | 2019-06-13 | 2020-12-17 | Intel Corporation | Micro light-emitting diode displays with improved power efficiency |
US11665929B2 (en) * | 2019-06-13 | 2023-05-30 | Intel Corporation | Micro light-emitting diode displays with improved power efficiency |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP2013254651A (ja) | 2013-12-19 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2013183751A1 (fr) | Substrat de luminophore, dispositif luminescent, dispositif d'affichage, et dispositif d'éclairage | |
US9512976B2 (en) | Light-emitting device, display device and illumination device | |
WO2014084012A1 (fr) | Substrat de corps de diffusion | |
US9091415B2 (en) | Light-emitting device, and display apparatus, which can efficiently emit, to outside, fluorescence generated in fluorescent layer and can realize high-luminance light emission and in which generation of blurriness and fuzziness of display is suppressed | |
JP2014052606A (ja) | 蛍光体基板、発光デバイス、表示装置、及び照明装置 | |
WO2013137052A1 (fr) | Substrat fluorescent et dispositif d'affichage pourvu dudit substrat fluorescent | |
US9099409B2 (en) | Organic electroluminescent display device, electronic apparatus including the same, and method for producing organic electroluminescent display device | |
JP5538519B2 (ja) | 発光素子、ディスプレイ及び表示装置 | |
US9182631B2 (en) | Phosphor substrate, display device, and electronic apparatus | |
US8796914B2 (en) | Organic electroluminescence element, organic electroluminescence display, and organic electroluminescence display apparatus | |
WO2012108384A1 (fr) | Substrat fluorescent et dispositif d'affichage et dispositif d'éclairage l'utilisant | |
WO2013111696A1 (fr) | Substrat de matériau fluorescent, appareil d'affichage et appareil électronique | |
WO2011129135A1 (fr) | Substrat fluorescent et son procédé de production, et dispositif d'affichage | |
WO2012090786A1 (fr) | Dispositif émetteur de lumière, dispositif d'affichage et dispositif d'éclairage | |
WO2013183696A1 (fr) | Substrat de matériau fluorescent, appareil d'affichage et appareil d'éclairage | |
WO2012081568A1 (fr) | Substrat fluorescent, dispositif d'affichage, et dispositif lumineux | |
WO2013133139A1 (fr) | Substrat de conversion de longueur d'onde et dispositif d'affichage l'utilisant, appareil électronique, et méthode de fabrication d'un substrat de conversion de longueur d'onde | |
JP2016218151A (ja) | 波長変換基板、発光装置並びにこれを備えた表示装置、照明装置および電子機器 | |
JP2014038702A (ja) | 波長変換基板およびそれを用いた表示装置、電子機器 | |
WO2011145418A1 (fr) | Dispositif d'affichage à matériau fluorescent, et couche de matériau fluorescent | |
WO2013065649A1 (fr) | Élément luminescent organique | |
WO2012043172A1 (fr) | Substrat phosphore, et dispositif d'affichage et dispositif d'éclairage le comprenant | |
WO2012081536A1 (fr) | Dispositif électroluminescent, dispositif d'affichage, appareil électronique, et dispositif d'éclairage | |
WO2012144426A1 (fr) | Substrat de corps lumineux fluorescent et dispositif d'affichage | |
WO2012121287A1 (fr) | Substrat à luminophores et dispositif d'affichage |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 13801378 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 13801378 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |